Electrolux - Ewf - 1230 Service

EMA
Alkatrészlista
Háztartási mosógépek
2520
PNC ELC Márkanév Modell Piac

914791392 00 Electrolux EWF1230 EE - FI - LT - LV
Elöltöltős mosógépek
Electrolux Italia S.p.A. Publikáció szám

Corso Lino Zanussi 30 599376411
I - 33080 Porcia 2006/04/07
Italy ZP
Fax +39 (0)434 394096
© Electrolux
© Electrolux - 1 -
Robbantott ábra szám: P09143025575
P09143027472
Mátrix PNC ELC Gyárt. Idő Modell
A 914791392 00 20060303 EWF1230
Poz. Anyagszám Mátrix Megnevezés
106 1249470103 A Összekötő darab,2 utas,3 SCOMP.

109 1240146249 A Serelt egység ,vízlefolyó,víz
110 1320721044 A Serelt egység ,leeresztő tömlő,OV
110C 1322897008 A Cső,mennyiség,mosószer,P62RIM G20
110S 1320365057 A Csõ,vízelvezetés,szűrő
110T 1247342718 A Tömlő,elektromos szelep,kád,D=10 L=125
110U 1249474212 A Tömlő,vízszelep,kád,D=12 L=125 EWM
111 1245078454 A Csatlakozó tömlő,L=1300mm
112 1240881217 A Leeresztő tömlő,L=2870
114 1243071105 A Légkamra,egy utas
120 1320713108 A Szűrő
130 1320712001 A Tömítés,szûrõ,durva szűrő
130D 50211158006 A Kerek tömítés,szorító gyűrű/szorító készülék,csökkentõ
130F 1240151009 A Tömítés
140 1248272237 A Elosztó,mosószer,NEAT RIM
145 1320715244 A Serelt egység ,szekrénytest,szivattyú,TR. RIM
148 1246136129 A Szifon,adalékok,3 scomparti UK
307 1246103111 A Mosószeres tartály,3 scomparti UK
338 1242916003 A Tömlőtartó,támasz
521 1320711003 A Fogantyúdugó,szûrõ,RIM TRAD.
527 1240681013 A Biztosító gyűrű,csökkentõ,csatlakozó tömlő
540 1240060002 A Tömlőszorító/tömlőbilincs,D=64
541 1246086233 A Vezetékrögzítõ,cső,hátsó panel
541A 1247341033 A Tartó,szelep
999 1051174801 A Tömlőszorító/tömlőbilincs,50,6-53,2 mm
999 1323159408 A Tömlőszorító/tömlőbilincs,D 40
© Electrolux - 2 -
© Electrolux - 3 -
P09143027473
A 914791392 00 20060303 EWF1230
013 1320163007 A Gmb ,biztonsági ,ökörszemablak,Ø15mm

130B 1321857003 A Betét,szekrénytest,antivibrante
260 1240673135 A Rgó ,biztonsági ,ökörszemablak
300 1321062117 A Szekrénytest,elülsõ (külsõ),RIM V/B
300A 1247779422 A Szekrénytest,hátsó,P62/3/5 V/B
303 1245812449 A Aljzat,P62S/RIM
308 1321442103 A Serelt egység ,ajtótartó,ökörszemablak,RIM
310 1321060004 A Szűrőfedél,fehér,RIM
312 1322245000 A Üveg,ökörszemablak,RIM
312A 1320191016 A Fdél ,ökörszemablak,NEAT A/S
323 1320184128 A Keret,hátsó,ökörszemablak,BD/D3 7801
323A 1320534116 A A-keretrész,ökörszemablak,elülsõ (külsõ),BD/AS 7801
328A 1245591001 A Vaklemez,padlólemez,P62/S
330 1321364018 A Serelt egység ,láb,peremes,20mm
330B 1245264203 A Serelt egység ,láb,elülsõ (külsõ),30mm
505 1249029107 A Védelem,kábel
521 1246445009 A (hordó)dugó,szekrénytest,fehér
523 1246586240 A Támasz,tömlő,kábel,FUN/RIM
523C 1245320005 A Támasztó szögvas,tömlő,aggregáttér burkolat
523C 1320727041 A Cõtartó ,hátsó panel,"OV"
530 50276640005 A Felszerelés,fogantyú,ökörszemablak,SENSA
555B 1320160011 A Ajtólemez,szekrénytest,BD 7801
999 1320792029 A Megszilárdulás,keret,ökörszemablak,OBLO' / SENSA
999 1320878018 A Támasztó szögvas,tömlő
999 1329878415 A Használati utasítás,(fi-sv-en)
999 50269225004 A Felszerelés,szállítás
© Electrolux - 4 -
© Electrolux - 5 -
P09143027474
A 914791392 00 20060303 EWF1230
004 1321950212 A Motor,230-240V,50Hz

005 3792260725 A Elektromos szelep,AF
006 1322082015 A Ürítő szivattyú/kifolyó szivattyú/öblítő szivattyú
007 1249675131 A Ajtózár,IDOLO
010 1321807115 A Fûtõpatron,val-, vel,érzékelõ,230V,1950W
011 1240343622 A Zavarszűrő kondenzátor,10A PROCOND
012 3792214615 A Nyomáskapcsoló,1L+AE+AT
037 1240209310 A Központi panel
110 1240834042 A Tömlőegység,nyomás,csõ
523 1247094004 A Csapszeg felfekvés,kábel,kád
531C 1240222016 A Csavar,5,5x38
550 1321444208 A Védelem,ajtóbiztosító szerkezet
550G 1321092007 A Érintkező védelem,kijelző- és kapcsoló modul,EWM1000
587 1321202283 A Konfigurálatlan elektronika,EWM1000
Az alkatrész beépítéséhez különleges szoftver és kiképz
587 973914791392009 A Konfigurált elektronika,EWM1000
597 1240062008 A Ütköző,kondenzátor,kábel
999 1241105004 A Kábel,föld,zavarszűrő kondenzátor
999 1243404009 A Kábel,föld
999 1249572023 A Hálózati kábel
999 1321231001 A Kábel,rádió zavarszűrő,főelektronika
999 1321232009 A Kábel,szelep ,ürítő szivattyú/kifolyó szivattyú/öblítő
999 1321233007 A Kábel,fûtõpatron,nyomásellenőrző,PCB
999 1321234013 A Kábel,ajtóbiztosító szerkezet,nyomáskapcsoló
999 1321240044 A Kábel,motor,hőmérsékletérzékelő,PCB
999 1321484006 A Kapocs,vezetékrögzítõ
© Electrolux - 6 -
© Electrolux - 7 -
P09143027475
A 914791392 00 20060303 EWF1230
115 1320041906 A Zárt átjáró,RIM

125 1320024001 A Rögzítő rugó,zárt átjáró,csõ ,BD
125A 1320552001 A Összekötõ gyûrû,zárt átjáró,szekrénytest,BD
130 1240159036 A Tömítõkeret,héj,csõ
130X 1249685007 A Tömítés,motortengely,35-62
150 50286971002 A Felszerelés,héj,ellensúly,14,5KG BIANCO
150A 1320769324 A Serelt egység ,héj,hátsó
250 1320045139 A Dob,komplett,G20 1000RPM BD
251A 1322553007 A Hangtompító
253 1240211506 A Heveder,gumi ,1196 J5
254A 50253016005 A Serelt egység ,dobcsillag,peremes
255 3790800001 A Golyóscsapágy,25x52x15
255 3790800209 A Golyóscsapágy,30x62x16
257 3794100127 A Ellensúly,hátsó,1.7kg G20
260 1322533009 A Rgó ,felfüggesztés,csõ ,NEUTRO
260B 1247825100 A Tartórugó,fûtõpatron
262 50252271007 A Felszerelés,dobbordázat,45L
264 1249691104 A Kerettárcsa,fém,D273mm,G20,1100/1200
531 5191370260 A Csavar,kerettárcsa,M10x25 T
531B 1322290014 A Cavar ,héj,csõ ,6,5x51 H
531C 1249659028 A Cavar ,ellensúly,hátsó,8x55 T
531D 1245717010 A Cavar ,ellensúly,8X59 TSP/TORX
531E 1240220010 A Cavar ,dobcsillag
563 1240041218 A Csavar,lengéscsillapító
591A 1242122115 A Alátét lemez,ellensúly,elülsõ (külsõ),(21,7x29)
© Electrolux - 8 -
© Electrolux - 9 -
P09143027476
A 914791392 00 20060303 EWF1230
313 3790012219 A Munkalap

500 1322968106 A Serelt egység ,gomb,választó
502A 1320581018 A Pecek alsórész,hõmérsékletszabályzó ,idõkapcsoló
510 1322836105 A Kezelõlap,fogantyú,Electrolux,EWF1230,Symbols
523 1321081133 A Kezelő tartó
525 1321099127 A Gmb ,ezüst ,kerek,Ø16mm
525C 1321094003 A Támasz,gombszett ,5,EWM1000
535A 1321095208 A Fényellenző,LED,EWM1000
563 1321096016 A Csap,programválasztó kapcsoló,EWM1000
© Electrolux - 10 -
P00ZP300003126
Anti-interference filter Zavarszűrő, mikrohullámú sütő

Door safety interlok Ajtó biztonsági zárolás
Drain pump Ürítő szivattyú
Earth Földelés
Heating element earth Fűtőbetét földelés
Heating elements (washing) Fűtőbetétek (mosás)
Junction box Kábelköteg doboz
Main electronic board Fő elektronikus alaplap
Motor Motor
Motor earth Motor földelés
Motor overload cut-out Motor túlterhelés kikapcsoló
Pilot lamp Jelzőlámpa
Pressure switch Nyomáskapcsoló
Prewasch valve Előmosás szelep
Temperature probe Hőfok szonda
Tub earth Üst földelés
Wash valve Főmosás vízszelep
Black Fekete
Blue Kék
Brown Barna
Green Zöld
Green-yellow Sárga/zöld
Grey Szürke
Orange Narancs
Pink Rózsaszin
Red Piros
Violet Lila
1
2
Tartalomjegyzék
1. BEVEZETÉS 5
1.1 A kézikönyv célja 5
2. DIAGNOSZTIKAI RENDSZER 6
2.1 A DIAGNOSZTIKAI RENDSZER ELÉRÉSE – VÍZSZINTES GOMBELRENDEZÉS 6
2.2 A DIAGNOSZTIKAI RENDSZER ELÉRÉSE – FÜGGOLEGES GOMBELRENDEZÉS 6
2.3 A DIAGNOSZTIKAI PROGRAM FÁZISAI 7
3. RIASZTÓ KIJELZÉSEK 8
3.1 Riasztó kijelzések a használónak 8
3.1.1 Riasztó kijelzések a normál gépüzem alatt 8
3.2 A riasztó kijelzések kiolvasása 9
3.2.1 Riasztó kijelzések 9
3.2.2 Riasztó kijelzési példák 9
3.2.3 A riasztó kijelzések alakulása a diagnosztikai program alatt 10
3.3 A riasztó kijelzések gyors kiolvasása 10
3.3.1 Vízszintes gombelrendezésu változat 10
3.3.2 Függoleges gombelrendezésu változat 10
3.4 AZ UTOLSÓ RIASZTÁS KIJELZÉSE 11
3.4.1 A RIASZTÁS TÖRLÉSE – VÍZSZINTES GOMBELRENDEZÉSU VÁLTOZAT 11
3.5 A RIASZTÁS TÖRLÉSE – FÜGGOLEGES GOMBELRENDEZÉSU VÁLTOZAT 11
3.6 A RIASZTÓ KIJELZÉSEK ÖSSZEFOGLALÓ TÁBLÁZATA 12
3.7 Útmutatások egy riasztások jellegéhez 14
4 A DIAGNOSZTIKAI PROGRAM NEM VÁLASZTHATÓ KI 15
4.1.1 Az elektronikus lap egyetlen LED-je sem világít 15
4.1.2 Az elektronikus lap több LED-je világít 15
5. HIBAKERESÉS A RIASZTÓ KÓDOK SZERINT 16
E11: Probléma a vízfeltöltésnél a mosóprogram alatt 16
E13: Lyukadás 18
E21: Probléma a kiszivattyúzásnál 20
E23: Probléma az alkatrésznél (Triac), amit az öblíto szivattyú vezérel 22
E24: Az alkatrész (Triac) „Sensing”-kör, amit az öblíto szivattyú vezérel, hibás 22
E33: Következetlenség a túlfutésvédelem érintkezo és a nyomásellenorzo 1. szint érintkezo zárása 24
között
E35: Vízszint túl magas 26
E36: A túlfutésvédelem-nyomásellenorzo „Sensing”-kör hibás 27
E37: Az 1. szint „Sensing”-kör hibás 27
E39: A túlfutésvédelem-nyomásellenorzo „Sensing HV”-kör hibás 27
E41: Ajtó nyitása (elso rész – berendezés 3 érintkezovel) 28
E41: Ajtó nyitása (második rész – berendezés 4 érintkezovel) 30
E42: Probléma az ajtónyitásnál (elso rész – berendezés 3 érintkezovel) 32
E42: Probléma az ajtónyitásnál (második rész – berendezés 4 érintkezovel) 34
E43: Probléma az alkatrésznél (Triac), ami az ajtókéslelteto egységet vezérli (elso rész) 36
E43: Probléma az alkatrésznél (Triac), ami az ajtókéslelteto egységet vezérli (második rész) 38
E44: Zárt ajtó „Sensing”-kör hibás 40
E45: Probléma az alkatrész (Triac) „Sensing”-körnél, ami az ajtókéslelteto egységet vezérli 42
E51: Triac motortáplálás rövidre van zárva 41
E52: Nem jelez a motor-tachogenerátor (elso rész) 42
E52: Nem jelez a motor-tachogenerátor (második rész) 44
E53: Probléma az alkatrész (Triac) „Sesing”-körnél , ami a motort táplálja 46
E54: A motorrelé érintkezok beragadva 47
E61: Nem kielégíto felfutés a mosóprogram alatt 48
E62: Túlfutés a mosóprogram alatt 50
E66: A futoegység relé érintkezo mindig zárva 52
E71: Mosóprogram NTC-szonda zavar 53
E82: Hiba a programválasztó törlés/ki pozíció kiolvasásánál 54
E83: Hiba a programválasztó-kód kiolvasásánál 54
E93: Készülék konfigurálási hiba 55
E94: Mosóprogram konfigurálási hiba 55
E95: Kommunikációs hiba a mikroprocesszor és a programtároló (EEPROM) között 55
E96: Következetlenség a kezelopanel változat és a konfigurációs adatok között 55
3
E97: Következetlenség a választó kapcsoló és a konfigurációs adatok között 55
EA1: Hibás a dobpozicionáló rendszer DSP (felültöltos) 56
EB1: Hibás hálózati frekvencia 57
EB2: Túl magas csatlakozó feszültség 57
EB3: Túl alacsony csatlakozó feszültség 57
6. KAPCSOLÁSI TERV 58
6.1 Azonnali ajtózárolás vázlat 58
6.2 Ajtószerkezet PTC-vel vázlat 59
6.2.1 Kapcsolási vázlat - jelmagyarázat 60
7. ELEKTROMOS LAP ÖSSZEKÖTOK 61
8. ÉGÉSI NYOMOK AZ ELEKTRONIKUS VEZÉRLOLAPON 62
8.1 AZ ALKATRÉSZOLDAL KÉPE (mindkét változatlan egyforma) 62
8.2 SZERELÉSI-OLDAL KÉPE (VÍZSZINTES GOMBELRENDEZÉS) 63
8.3 SZERELÉSI-OLDAL KÉPE (FÜGGOLEGES GOMBELERENDEZÉS) 64
4
1 BEVEZETÉS
1.1 A kézikönyv célja
Ennek a kézikönyvnek az a célja, egyszeru és sematikus módon ismertesse azokat a lépéseket, amelyek segítik a
technikusokat abban, hogy az EWM1000 sorozat elektromos készülékeknél fellépo különbözo hibakódokkal
kijelzett zavarait figyelemmel kísérjék.
A riasztások függetlenek a készülék konfigurációjától és a használó számára teljesen, vagy részben kijelzésre
kerülnek: általában az utolsó megoldás alkalmazására.
A diagnosztikai rendszer alkalmazhatják a technikusok:
• a riasztás kiolvasásához,
• a tárolt riasztások törléséhez,
• a készülék funkcióképességének teszteléséhez.
1.2 Végrehajtás
1. A vezérlés jellege könnyen megállapítható (vízszintes, vagy függoleges gombok) és könnyen kiválasztható a
diagnosztikai program (lásd 6. oldal).
2. A tárolt riasztás kiolvasása (9. oldal) és az útbaigazító „Riasztókódok” utánolvasása (12-13. oldal).
3. A tárolt riasztás törlése (11. oldal).
4. Ha a diagnosztikai program nem érheto el, akkor „A diagnosztikai rendszer nem választható ki” c. fejezetet
kell áttanulmányozni (15. oldal).
5. Ha ki kell cserélni az elektronikus folapot, akkor ellenorizni kell, hogy nincs-e rajta beégés (62-64. oldal).
6. A készülék funkcióképességét minden beavatkozása után a diagnosztikai program alapján kell felülvizsgálni
(6. oldal).
7. A diagnosztikai program alatt lehetoleg törölni kell a tárolt riasztás (11. oldal).
5
2 DIAGNOSZTIKAI RENDSZER
2.1 A DIAGNOSZTIKAI RENDSZER ELÉRÉSE – VÍZSZINTES GOMBELRENDEZÉSU
VÁLTOZAT
1. Kapcsolja ki a készüléket.
2. Nyomja meg egyszerre a START/PAUSE-gombot és egy tetszés szerinti kiegészíto funkció gombot.
3. Tartsa benyomva a gombokat és kapcsolja be a készüléket, miközben a programválasztót az óra járásával
egyezo irányba egy pozícióval állítsa elore.
4. Tartsa addig benyomva a START/PAUSE és a pótfunkció gombokat, amíg a LED-ek villogni nem kezdenek
(legalább 2 másodperc).
Figyelem: A Start/Pause gomb a modell kialakításától függ és nem mindig az itt magadott pozícióban
található!
Az elso állásban a gombok és a hozzá tartozó LED-ek funkciótesztje hajtódnak végre. A programválasztónak az
óra járásával egyezo irányba történo elforgatásával a különbözo alkotórészek funkcióit lehet átvizsgálni és ki
lehet olvasni a riasztó jelzéseket.
2.2 A DIAGNOSZTIKAI RENDSZER ELÉRÉSE – FÜGGOLEGES GOMBELRENDEZÉSU

VÁLTOZAT
1. Kapcsolja ki a készüléket.
2. Nyomja meg egyszerre a 2-es és a 3-as gombokat.
3. Tartsa benyomva a gombokat és kapcsolja be a készüléket, miközben a programválasztót az óra járásával
egyezo irányba egy pozícióval állítsa elore.
4. Tartsa addig benyomva a 3-as és a 2-es gombokat, amíg a LED-ek villogni nem kezdenek (legalább 2
másodperc).
Az elso állásban a gombok és a hozzá tartozó LED-ek funkciótesztje hajtódnak végre. A programválasztónak az
óra járásával egyezo irányba történo elforgatásával a különbözo alkotórészek funkcióit lehet átvizsgálni és ki
lehet olvasni a riasztó jelzéseket.
6
2.3 A DIAGNOSZTIKAI PROGRAM FÁZISAI
Az elektronikus vezérlés módjától (vízszintes, vagy függoleges gombelrendezés) és a programválasztó
konfigurációjától függetlenül a diagnosztikai rendszer aktivizálása után a programválasztónak az óra járásával
egyezo irányba történo elforgatásával a különbözo alkotórészek funkcióit lehet átvizsgálni és ki lehet olvasni a
riasztó jelzéseket.
A diagnosztikai program minden riasztó jelzést aktivizál
Kapcsoló állása Aktív részek Üzemi körülmények Felülvizsgált funkciók

• Minden LED egymás után
felgyullad.
1 • Egy gomb megnyomása után
felgyullad a megfelelo LED Mindig aktív Csatlakozó funkciók
(és ha van, akkor megszólal
a Summer hang)
• Ajtózárolás. Ajtó zárva Vízfeltöltés
• Solenoid szelep - Fomosás Vízszint túlfolyási szint Fomosás – betölto rekesz
2 alatt
Legnagyobb ido 5 perc

• Solenoid szelep - Elomosás Vízszint túlfolyási szint Elomosás – (fehérítoszeres)
3 alatt betölto rekesz

• Solenoid szelep – Fo- és Vízszint túlfolyási szint Lágyöblíto – betölto rekesz
4 elomosás alatt
• Ajtózárolás. Ajtó zárva

• Solenoid szelep – Fomosás, Vízszint 1. szint felett
6 ha a víz a tartályban az 1. Legnagyobb ido 10 perc, Futés
szint alatt van vagy 90oC (*)
• Futoegység
• Ajtózárolás.
• Solenoid szelep – Fomosás, Átvizsgálás
7 ha a víz a tartályban az 1. vízállapot
szint alatt van Ajtó zárva öblíto tartályban
• Motor (55 ford/perc óra Vízszint 1. szint felett
járásával egyezo irány, 55
ford/perc óra járásával
ellentétes irány, impulzus .
250 ford/perc-cel)
Kiszivattyúzás és centrifugálás
• Ajtózárolás. Ajtó zárva A nyomásellenorzo zárás
• Öblíto szivattyú Vízszint a biztonsági átvizsgálása
8 • Motor 650 ford/perc-ig, utána szint alatt a
legmagasabb centrifugálási centrifugáláshoz
fordulatszám
Kiszivattyúzás és centrifugálás
• Csak a felültöltosnél, amelyek Ajtó zárva A nyomásellenorzo zárás
dobpozícionálóval Vízszint a biztonsági átvizsgálása
9 rendelkeznek szint alatt
• Ajtózárolás. Max. ido 2 perc
• Motor (25 ford/perc), öblíto
szivattyú
(*) A legtöbb esetben ez az ido a felfutési ellenorzéssel telik el, amelyben a fázis a víz kiszivattyúzása nélkül
o
ismétlodik, és újra visszakapcsol a felfutési fázisra (ha a hofok magasabb, mint 80 C, akkor nincs felfutés).
7
3 RIASZTÓ KIJELZÉSEK
3.1 Riasztó kijelzések a használónak
A riasztó kijelzések vezérlése konfigurálható. Modelltol függoen a riasztó kijelzéseket teljesen, vagy
részlegesen ki lehet jelezni a felhasználó számára.
Normál esetben a használó számára minden riasztás kijelezheto, ezen kívül:

• E61 (elégtelen a futés a mosó program alatt),
• E63 (hiba a programválasztó olvasásánál),
• EA1 (hiba a dob pozícionálásnál – felültöltos).
A riasztó kijelzések a mosóprogram alatt aktivizálva vannak. Ebbol kivétel a konfiguráció és a

feszültség/frekvencia, amelyeket a programválasztóval is ki lehet jelezni.
Általános esetben riasztási állapot lehet (ha más nincs megadva) a nyitott ajtó, ha:
• a vízszint az öblíto tartályban az 1. szint alatt van,
• a vízhomérséklet kevesebb, mint 40oC.
Néhány riasztó kijelzésnél biztonsági okból a vizet ki kell szivattyúzni, mielott ki akarja nyitni az ajtót:
• vízfeltöltés hutése, ha a homérséklet több, mint 60oC,
• kiszivattyúzás mindkét nyomásellenorzo érintkezo zárásáig (1. szint és biztonsági nyomásellenorzo) „Üres”-
állapotba, egyikben 5 perc max. ido.
3.1.1 Riasztó kijelzések a normál gépüzem alatt
A használónak egy aktuális riasztó jelzés érkezik a „PROGRAM VÉGE” LED-kijelzo ütemes villogása
által (0,4 mp-ig be, 0,4 mp-ig ki és eközben 2,5 mp-ig tartó szünet). Ez a LED minden modellnél szerepel,
függetlenül a konfigurációk közti különbségre. Egy konfigurációs hiba az összes LED-nél villogó állapotot
hoz létre.
Ha például a használó elfelejti bezárni az ajtót, akkor kb. 15 mp-cel a program indítása után az E14
riasztás kiváltja az ellenorzo rendszert, a program a szünet-üzemmódra kapcsol és a „Program vége”
LED villogni kezd a táblázatban megadott ütemben.
Többszörös villogást jelez az E41 riasztás két betujének egyike (a riasztó

kijelzések, az egy és ugyanazon funkciókra vonatkoznak, összefogva a riasztó
csoportban).
Miután bezárta az ajtót, ebben az esetben csak a Start-gombot kell megnyomni a

program elindításához.
8
3.2 A riasztó kijelzések kiolvasása
Az elektronikus vezérlésnek az EEPROM-ban lévo utoljára tárolt riasztó kijelzéseinek a
kiolvasásához:
• a diagnosztikai rendszer aktivizálni kell,
• az elektronikus vezérlés és konfiguráció módjától függetlenül, a programválasztót el kell
forgatni az óra járásával egyezo irányba és be kell állítani a tizedik pozícióba.
3.2.1 Riasztó kijelzések

A riasztás a két LED ütemes villogása által (0,4 mp-ig be, 0,4 mp-ig ki és eközben 2,5 mp-ig tartó
szünet) kerül kijelzésre. A Summer – ha van -, összhangban a LED-ek villogásával „Bip”-hangot
hallat.
• PROGRAM VÉGE kijelzo LED → a riasztó kód elso betujét mutatja (riasztó csoport).
• START/PAUSE → a riasztó kód második betujét mutatja (a szám a riasztó csoporton belül).
Ez a két LED minden modellnél szerepel, még akkor is, ha eltéroen vannak konfigurálva és
egyszerre villognak.
Megjegyzések:
• A riasztó kód elso betuje „E” (Error) nem kerül kijelzésre, mivel ez minden riasztó kódnál azonos.
• A riasztó csoportok hexadecimális rendszerben nyomtatódnak ki, azaz a betuk a következo sorrendben
kerülnek kijelzésre:
→ A 10-szer villog
→ B 11-szer villog
→ …
→ F 15-ször villog
• Konfigurációs hibánál minden LED villogni kezd (felhasználói csatlakó nincs konfigurálva).
3.2.2 Riasztó kijelzési példák

Ha vesszük az E43-jelu riasztási példát (probléma a biztonsági berendezés TRIAC-nál az ajtónyitás számára),
akkor a kijelzések a következoképpen néznek ki:
• A „Program vége” LED négyszeri villogása az E43 elso számjegyét jelzi ki,
• A „Program vége” LED háromszori villogása az E43 második számjegyét jelzi ki.
3.2.3 A riasztó kijelzések alakulása a diagnosztikai program alatt

Az összetevok funkciótesztje alatt minden riasztó kijelzés aktív állapotban van.
9
3.3 A riasztó kijelzések gyors kiolvasása
Az utoljára bekövetkezett riasztó kijelzést akkor is ki lehet olvasni, ha a programválasztó nem áll a tizedik
pozícióban, illetve a gép normál üzemmódban található (pl. a mosóprogram lefutása alatt).
3.3.1. Változat vízszintes gombokkal

→ Nyomja meg egyszerre a START/PAUSE-gombot és egy tetszés szerinti
funkciógombot és legalább 2 mp-ig tartsa benyomva oket: a LED-ek
eloször kialszanak és ezután ütemesen villogni, kezd a riasztó kód.
→ A riasztó ütemes villogása addig tart, amíg a gombokat benyomva tartja.
→ A riasztó kijelzések kiolvasását a 3.2.1 szakaszban leírtak az irányadók.
→ Azon ido alatt, amelynél a riasztó jelzések kijelzésre kerülnek, a program
tovább fut, vagy annál a programválasztónál marad eltárolva, amit a
korábban kiválasztott kiegészíto funkciókkal beállítottak.
3.3.2. Változat függoleges gombokkal
→ Nyomja meg egyszerre a 3-as és a 2-es gombokat és legalább 2

mp-ig tartsa benyomva oket: a LED-ek kialszanak és ezután ütemesen
villogni kezd a riasztó kód.
→ A riasztó ütemes villogása addig tart, amíg a gombokat benyomva
tartja.
→ A riasztó kijelzések kiolvasását a 3.2.1 szakaszban leírtak az
irányadók.
→ Azon ido alatt, amelynél a riasztó jelzések kijelzésre kerülnek, a
program tovább fut, vagy annál a programválasztónál marad eltárolva, amit a korábban kiválasztott kiegészíto
funkciókkal beállítottak.
10
3.4 AZ UTOLSÓ RIASZTÁS KIJELZÉSE
Az eltárolt riasztó jelzések normál módon törölhetok,
• az adatok kiolvasása után ellenorizze, hogy ezek a diagnosztikai program alatt megjelennek-e újra,
• a készülék javítása után ellenorizze, hogy ezek a funkcióteszt alatt megjelennek-e újra.
3.4.1 A RIASZTÁS TÖRLÉSE – VÍZSZINTES GOMBELRENDEZÉSU VÁLTOZAT
1. A riasztás kiolvasásának aktivizálásához (a programválasztó tizedik pozíciója, lásd 3.2. fejezet).

2. Nyomja meg egyszerre a START/PAUSE-gombot és egy tetszés szerinti kiegészíto funkció gombot.
3. Tartsa a START/PAUSE és a kiegészíto funkció gombot addig benyomva, amíg: a LED-ek villogni kezdenek
(kb. 5 másodperc).
Figyelem: A Start/Pause gomb a modell kialakításától függoen különbözoen lehet konfigurálva és nem
mindig az itt magadott pozícióban található!
3.5. A RIASZTÁS TÖRLÉSE – FÜGGOLEGES GOMBELRENDEZÉSU VÁLTOZAT
1. A riasztás kiolvasásának aktivizálásához (a programválasztó tizedik pozíciója, lásd 3.2. fejezet).

2. Nyomja meg egyszerre a 3-as és a 2-es gombokat.
3. Tartsa a START/PAUSE és a kiegészíto funkció gombot addig benyomva, amíg: a LED-ek villogni kezdenek
(kb. 5 másodperc).
11
3.6 A RIASZTÓ KIJELZÉSEK ÁTTEKINTO TÁBLÁZATA
Riasztás Leírása Lehetséges hiba Tevékenység / gép állapot Reset

A csap zárva van, vagy a fo nyomáskapcsoló Start
hatástalan, a kifolyócso elhelyezése nem
E11 Nehézségek a mosóvíz feltöltésben megfelelo, vízfeltölto mágnestekercs szelepe Ciklus szünetel
hibás, szivárgás van a hidraulikus rendszer
nyomáskapcsolója felöl, hibás a nyomáskapcsoló,
huzalozási hiba, PCB hiba
Kifolyócso elhelyezése nem megfelelo, fo Start
nyomáskapcsoló hatástalan, vízfeltölto
E13 Vízszivárgás mágnestekercs szelepe hibás, szivárgás van a Ciklus szünetel
hidraulikus rendszer nyomáskapcsolója felöl, hibás
a nyomáskapcsoló
Kifolyócso elhelyezése nem megfelelo, megtört, Start
összenyomódott, kifolyó szuro eltömodött, piszkos,
E21 Szivattyúzási nehézségek üríto szivattyú hibás, huzalozási hiba, PCB hiba, Ciklus szünetel
szivárgás a futobetét körül
E23 Üríto szivattyú tirisztor hibás Üríto szivattyú hiba, huzalozási hiba, PCB hiba Biztonsági szivattyúzás – KI
ciklus ajtónyitással leáll
E24 Hiba van az üríto szivattyú tirisztor érzékelésben PCB hiba Biztonsági szivattyúzás – KI
E33 Összeférhetetlenség van a túlforrás-védelem és Nyomáskapcsoló hiba, szivárgás van a futobetét Biztonsági szivattyúzás – KI
az 1. szint nyomáskapcsoló érintkezok között körül, huzalozási hiba, PCB hiba ciklus ajtónyitással leáll
Vízfeltölto mágnestekercs hiba, szivárgás a Ciklus megállt, biztonsági KI
hidraulikus kör nyomáskapcsolója felöl, szivattyúzás, szivattyú
E35 Víz túlfolyás van (elárasztás) nyomáskapcsoló hiba, huzalozási hiba, PCB hiba muködik (5 percre
bekapcsol, 5 percre
kikapcsol)
E36 A túlforrás védo kapcsolónál érzékelési hiba van PCB hiba Ciklus megállt, ajtó zárva KI
E37 1. szint érzékelési hiba PCB hiba Ciklus megállt, ajtó zárva KI
E39 Túlfolyás-védelmi szint HV érzékeloje hibás PCB hiba Ciklus megállt, ajtó zárva KI
E41 Ajtónyitás Ajtózár hiba, huzalozási hiba, PCB hiba Ciklus szünetel Start
E42 Ajtózárási probléma Ajtózár hiba, huzalozási hiba, PCB hiba Ciklus szünetel Start
E43 Tirisztor áramellátási hiba Ajtózár hiba, huzalozási hiba, PCB hiba Biztonsági szivattyúzás – KI
ciklus leáll
E44 Ajtózár érzékelési hiba PCB hiba Biztonsági szivattyúzás – KI
ciklus leáll
E45 Ajtózárérzékelo áramkör hiba PCB hiba Biztonsági szivattyúzás – KI
ciklus leáll
12
Riasztás Leírása Lehetséges hiba Tevékenység / gép állapot Reset
E51 Motor áramellátó tirisztor zárlatos PCB hiba, szivárgás a motor, vagy a huzalozás Ciklus megáll, ajtó zárva KI
felöl (próbálkozás 5 perc múlva)
E52 Nincs jel a motor fordulatszámméro generátortól Motorhiba, huzalozási hiba, PCB hiba Ciklus megáll, ajtó zárva KI
(próbálkozás 5 perc múlva)
E53 Motor tirisztor érzékelo áramköri hiba PCB hiba Ciklus megáll, ajtó zárva KI
E54 Motor relé érintkezok beragadtak PCB hiba, szivárgás a motor, vagy a huzalozás Ciklus megáll, ajtó zárva KI
felöl (próbálkozás 5 perc múlva)
E61 Hatástalan a futés a mosás alatt NTC érzékelo hiba, futobetét hiba, huzalozási hiba, A futési fázist átugrotta -
PCB hiba
E62 Túlfutés a mosás alatt NTC érzékelo hiba, futobetét hiba, huzalozási hiba, Biztonsági szivattyúzás – KI
PCB hiba ciklus ajtónyitással leáll
E66 Futobetét áramellátó relé hiba PCB hiba, szivárgás a futobetét körül Biztonsági szivattyúzás – KI
E71 Mosó NTC érzékelo hiba NTC érzékelo hiba, huzalozási hiba, PCB hiba A futési fázist átugrotta Start
E82 Hiba a reset választó pozícióban PCB hiba -- KI
E83 Hiba a leolvasás pozícióban Nem megfelelo konfigurálási adat, PCB hiba Ciklus törlodött -
E93 Nem megfelelo készülék konfiguráció Nem megfelelo konfigurálási adat, PCB hiba Ciklus megszakadt KI
E94 Nem megfelelo mosási ciklus konfiguráció Nem megfelelo konfigurálási adat, PCB hiba Ciklus megszakadt KI
E95 Kommunikációs hiba a mikroprocesszor és az PCB hiba Ciklus megszakadt KI
EEPROM között
E96 Összeférhetetlenség a változat és a konfiguráció Nem megfelelo konfigurálási adat, PCB hiba Ciklus megszakadt KI
között
E97 Összeférhetetlenség a beállító és a ciklus Nem megfelelo konfigurálási adat, PCB hiba Ciklus megszakadt KI
konfiguráció között
EB1 Nem megfelelo készülék frekvencia Áramellátási problémák, PCB hiba Ciklus megszakadt --
EB2 Feszültség túl magas Áramellátási problémák, PCB hiba Ciklus megszakadt --
EB3 Feszültség túl alacsony Áramellátási problémák, PCB hiba Ciklus megszakadt --
13
3.7 Útmutatások az egyes riasztások jellegéhez
• Konfigurációs riasztások E93-E96: ha ezek a riasztások kerültek megállapításra (bekapcsolásnál), a készülék megáll és minden LED felgyullad: a
diagnosztikai program nem választható ki és ezek az egyes történések kikapcsolják a készüléket (programválasztó 0-állásban).
• Konfigurációs riasztás E94: ennél a riasztásnál csak a „9” riasztó csoport kerül kijelzésre. A diagnosztikai program nem választható ki és a
„Gyors riasztójelzés” elérése nem alkalmazható.
• Riasztások EB1-EB2-EB3: a csatlakozó feszültséggel való problémák esetében a készülék riasztási állapotban marad, amíg a hálózati feszültség, vagy a
hálózati frekvencia vissza nem tér a normál értékre, vagy a készülék nincs kikapcsolva (programválasztó 0-állásban). A „B”-jelu riasztó csoport jelzi ki és a
diagnosztikai program nem választható ki és a „Gyors riasztójelzés” elérése nem alkalmazható: az állandó riasztás csak akkor olvasható, ha a kivételes
állapot feloldása újra megtörténik.
• Riasztások E51-E52: a diagnosztikai teszt alatt minden riasztás kijelzésre kerül: normál módon, ha a programválasztó egy kontrollfázis elott a következohöz
visszatér, akkor a készülék befejezi a riasztási állapotot és elvégzi a kiválasztott programot. Ez nem történik meg az E51-es riasztásnál (Triac motortáplálás
rövidzár) és az 52-nél (a motor-tachometernek nincs jele): egyes modelleknél a riasztási állapot befejezodik, ami abból áll, hogy a mosógép kikapcsol,
miközben a programválasztó a „0”-pozícióra (Reset) áll.
14
4. A DIAGNOSZTIKAI PROGRAM NEM VÁLASZTHATÓ KI
4.1.1. Az elektronikus lap egyetlen LED-je sem világít
Rendben van az áramvezeto kábel Nem Az áramvezeto kábelt kicserélni /

és a csatlakozás? → rendbe tenni, csatlakozót átvizsgálni.
Igen ↓
Funkcionál a zavarszuro? Nem Cserélje ki a zavarszurot.
→
Igen ↓
Rendben van az elektronikus lapon a Nem Javítsa/cserélje ki a kábelezést.
zavarszuro kábelezése →
(J8.1 - J8.2 csatlakozó)?
Igen ↓
Mechanikusan funkcionál a Nem Forgógombot/tengelyt
programválasztó forgógomb? → megjavítani/kicserélni.
Igen ↓
Az elektronikus lapot kicserélni és a
diagnosztikai programot ismét
lefuttatni.
4.1.2. Az elektronikus lap több LED-je világít
Szabadon mozognak a gombok a Nem A mechanikus problémát kijavítani

kezelopanel nyílásában és rendesen → (kezelopanel/gombok/tengely)
muködtethetok a gombok?
Igen ↓
Az elektronikus lapot kicserélni és a Nem Cserélje ki a zavarszurot.
diagnosztikai programot ismét →
lefuttatni.
Ha a folapon égési nyomok vannak,

akkor lásd a 62-64. oldalt.
15
5. HIBAKERESÉS A RIASZTÓ KÓDOK SZERINT
E11: Probléma a vízfeltöltésnél a mosóprogram alatt
E11 E11
Maximális ido minden vízfeltöltéshez minden nyomásellenorzo szinthez
(az idot minden alkalommal, ha eléri a szintet, nullára állítani)
Elvégzendo ellenorzések:
NEM
Be van kapcsolva a diagnosztikai program és minden kamrában van vízbetöltés (2,3,4 fázisok),
minden tartályba be van töltve víz?
ê IGEN
Helyesen van elhelyezve a kifolyótömlo és NEM Javítsa ki a kiszivattyúzó kört és futtassa le
nincs megsérülve a szifon? (16. kép) újra a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
riasztások megállapításához.
ê IGEN
Rendben van a mosógép hidraulikus köre NEM Javítsa ki a hidraulikus kört és futtassa le
(lyukadás)? újra a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
ê IGEN
Rendben van a hidraulikus kör NEM Javítsa ki a hidraulikus kört és futtassa le
nyomásellenorzoje (lyukadás / elzáródás)? újra a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
(2. kép) riasztások megállapításához.
ê IGEN
Lezár a nyomásellenorzo miután a víz az NEM Cserélje ki a nyomásellenorzot és futtassa le
ablakig betöltodött, helyes-e az érintkezés? újra a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
(11-14,21-24 érintkezok zárva, lásd. 3. kép) riasztások megállapításához.
ê IGEN
Rendben van a nyomásellenorzo és A kábelezést cserélje ki / javítsa ki és
elektronikus lap összeköttetésének NEM futtassa le újra a diagnosztikai programot az
kábelezése? – J2-1 és J2-2 között egy zárt egyéb riasztások megállapításához.
kört és J2-2 és J6-1 között a futoegység
értékét mérni (1. kép) (kb. 27 Ω 1950 W –
230 V)
ê IGEN
Az elektronikus lapot cserélje ki és futtassa le újra a diagnosztikai programot, az egyéb riasztások
megállapításához.
Funkcionál mindegyik elektromos szelep? NEM Ellenorizze, hogy a vízcsap nyitva van-e,
hogy nem túl alacsony-e a víznyomás és
hogy nincs-e megtörve, vagy elzáródva a
tömlo?
ê IGEN
Az elektromos szelep ohm-értéke – 3,5-4,5 KΩ? NEM Az elektromos szelepet cserélje ki és
(közvetlenül az elektromos szelepnél mérni futtassa le újra a diagnosztikai programot az
kábelezés nélkül) (lásd 4. kép) egyéb riasztások megállapításához.
ê IGEN
Az összekötést újra csatlakoztatni és kb. 3,5-4,5 A kábelezést cserélje ki, javítsa meg és
KΩ-ot mérni az elektromos szelep kábelezésének NEM futtassa le újra a diagnosztikai programot az
összekötésének vezérlo lap oldalán (1. kép): J3-7 egyéb riasztások megállapításához.
és J3-6 fomosás között, J3.2 és J3.5 elomosás
között, ha az elektromos szelep kábelezése
rendben van).
ê IGEN
Az elektronikus lapot cserélje ki és futtassa le újra Ha a folapon égési nyomok vannak, akkor
a diagnosztikai programot, az egyéb riasztások lásd a 62-64. oldalt.
16
17
E13: Lyukadás
E13 E13
Az együttes maximális ido a vízfeltöltéshez átlépve (minden vízfeltöltés összege egy
kiszivattyúzás és a következo között, a maximális térfogat átlépésének elkerülésére)
NEM
Be van kapcsolva a diagnosztikai program és minden kamrában van vízbetöltés (2,3,4 fázisok),
minden tartályba be van töltve víz?
ê IGEN
Helyesen van elhelyezve a kifolyótömlo és NEM Javítsa ki a kiszivattyúzó kört és futtassa le
nincs megsérülve a szifon? (16. kép) újra a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
ê IGEN
Rendben van a mosógép hidraulikus köre NEM Javítsa ki a hidraulikus kört és futtassa le
(lyukadás)? újra a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
ê IGEN
Rendben van a hidraulikus kör NEM Javítsa ki a hidraulikus kört és futtassa le
nyomásellenorzoje (lyukadás / elzáródás)? újra a diagnosztikai programot, az egyéb
(2. kép) riasztások megállapításához.
ê IGEN
Lezár a nyomásellenorzo miután a víz az NEM Cserélje ki a nyomásellenorzot és futtassa le
ablakig betöltodött, helyes-e az érintkezés? újra a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
(11-14,21-24 érintkezok zárva, lásd. 3. kép) riasztások megállapításához.
ê IGEN
Rendben van a nyomásellenorzo és A kábelezést cserélje ki / javítsa ki és
elektronikus lap összeköttetésének NEM futtassa le újra a diagnosztikai programot az
kábelezése? – J2-1 és J2-2 között egy zárt egyéb riasztások megállapításához.
kört és J2-2 és J6-1 között a futoegység
értékét mérni (1. kép) (kb. 27 Ω 1950 W –
230 V)
ê IGEN
Az elektronikus lapot cserélje ki és futtassa le újra a diagnosztikai programot, az egyéb riasztások
Funkcionál mindegyik elektromos szelep? NEM Ellenorizze, hogy a vízcsap nyitva van-e,
hogy nem túl alacsony-e a víznyomás és
hogy nincs-e megtörve, vagy elzáródva a
tömlo?
ê IGEN
Az elektromos szelep ohm-értéke – 3,5-4,5 KΩ? NEM Az elektromos szelepet cserélje ki és
(közvetlenül az elektromos szelepnél mérni futtassa le újra a diagnosztikai programot az
kábelezés nélkül) (lásd 4. kép) egyéb riasztások megállapításához.
ê IGEN
Az összekötést újra csatlakoztatni és kb. 3,5-4,5 A kábelezést cserélje ki, javítsa meg és
KΩ-ot mérni az elektromos szelep kábelezésének NEM futtassa le újra a diagnosztikai programot az
összekötésének vezérlo lap oldalán (1. kép): J3-7 egyéb riasztások megállapításához.
és J3-6 fomosás között, J3.2 és J3.5 elomosás
között, ha az elektromos szelep kábelezése
rendben van).
ê IGEN
Az elektronikus lapot cserélje ki és futtassa le újra Ha a folapon égési nyomok vannak, akkor
a diagnosztikai programot, az egyéb riasztások lásd a 62-64. oldalt.
18
19
E21: Probléma a kiszivattyúzásnál
E21 E21
A maximális ido a kiszivattyúzáshoz átlépve (minden programfázis megmérve)
Tiszta a kifolyó szuro? NEM Tisztítsa ki a kifolyó szurot és futtassa le újra a

diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások
ê IGEN
Rendben van a kifolyó rendszer? NEM Szétszerelés és a kifolyó rendszer ellenorzése.
(kifolyócso és a ház vízellátása – 16. kép)
ê IGEN
Funkcionál az öblíto A szivattyú ohm- A szivattyú ohm- Cserélje ki a
szivattyú? (a diagnosztikai értéke kb. 155- értéke kb. 155-200Ω? szivattyút és
program 2 fázis betöltés NEM 200Ω? NEM (Közvetlenül a NEM futtassa le újra a
és 3 fázis (Közvetlenül a lap szivattyúnál mérni diagnosztikai
kiszivattyúzásnál) kábelezési 5. kép) programot, az egyéb
(szivattyúzajok) oldalán mérni a riasztások
J3-4 és J3-1 megállapításához.
között – 1. kép)
IGEN IGEN IGEN
Kábelezést ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a

Mechanikusan NEM Az elektromos lapot kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a

blokkolt a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások
szivattyú, vagy megállapításához.
elromlott?
êIGEN
Az öblíto szivattyút kitisztítani/kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
programot az egyéb riasztások megállapításához.
Rendben van a hidraulikus kör nyomásellenorzoje NEM Javítsa ki a hidraulikus kört és futtassa le újra a
(vagy elzáródás)? diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások
ê IGEN
Nyit a nyomásellenorzo miután kiszivattyúzta a vizet, NEM Cserélje ki a nyomásellenorzot és futtassa le újra a
helyes-e az érintkezés? (11-14,21-24 érintkezok diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások
zárva, lásd. 3a. kép) megállapításához.
ê IGEN
Rendben van a nyomásellenorzo és elektronikus lap NEM A kábelezést cserélje ki / javítsa ki és futtassa le
összeköttetésének kábelezése? (1. kép) (J2.1-J2.2, újra a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások
J2-2 és J6-1 között érintkezok nyitva). megállapításához.
ê IGEN
A zavarokat a futoegység okozhatja, amit a szigetelo réteg elvesztése és a folap Ha a folapon égési nyomok
különös jelzése adhat. Ez a károsodás akkor lép fel, ha a futoegység forró. Ezért vannak, akkor lásd a 62-64.
az ellenorzés elott kapcsolja be a futoegységet (15. kép) (diagnosztikai program oldalt.
6. fázis). Ha a futoegység nem mutat semmiféle hibát, akkor cserélje ki az
elektronikus lapot és futtassa le újra a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
20
21
E23 E23: Probléma az alkatrésznél (Triac), amit az öblíto szivattyú vezérel E23
A szivattyú ohm-értéke kb. 155- A szivattyú ohm-értéke kb. 155- A szivattyút kicserélni és újra
200Ω? NEM 200Ω? NEM lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
(a J3-4 és J3-1 összekötok (közvetlenül a szivattyúnál mérve programot az egyéb
között, a lap oldalán mérve -5. kép). riasztások megállapításához.
-1. kép).
IGEN IGEN
A kábelezést ellenorizni/kicserélni
és újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
programot az egyéb riasztások
A J3-4 / J3-1 összekötok és a készülék szerkezete NEM Az elektromos lapot cserélje ki és futtassa le újra a
között mérni. – 9. ábra – diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások
Van veszteség? megállapításához.
IGEN
A kábelezést ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

vannak, akkor lásd a 62-64. oldalt.
E24 E24: Az alkatrész (Triac) „Sensing”-kör, amit az öblíto szivattyú vezérel, hibás E24
Az elektronikus lapot kicserélni és

újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai

22
23
E33: Következetlenség a túlfutésvédelem érintkezo és a nyomásellenorzo 1. szint
E33 E33
érintkezo zárása között
A túlfutésvédelem érintkezo nyitva és az 1. szint zárva, vagy több mint 3 mp-ig
következetlenség áll fenn a nyomásellenorzo szint között.
A víz kiszivattyúzása az öblíto tartályból. A nyomásellenorzést

A nyomásellenorzo 11 és 14, 21 és 24 NEM kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a
érintkezok között egy nyílt kör lett mérve? – diagnosztikai programot az
3a. kép- egyéb riasztások
ê IGEN
Csatlakoztassa újra az összekötéseket. A nyomásellenorzést
Kapcsolja be a diagnosztikai programot és NEM kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a
válassza a 6 fázist, a vizet hagyja az 1. diagnosztikai programot az
fázisig és utána kezdje el a felfutést (a egyéb riasztások
nyomásellenorzonél 2 „klikk-hangot” kell megállapításához.
hallani).
Közvetlenül a nyomásellenorzonél mérni.
NE VEGYE LE A TÖMLOT.
Lett a 11 és 14, 21 és 24 érintkezok között
egy zárt kör mérve? –3.a. kép -
ê IGEN
Megmérni a futoegység (Ω) értékét a Az ohm-értéket közvetlenül a A futoegységet
végcsatlakozók J2-1 és J6-1 összekötok NEM futoegység NEM kicserélni és újra
kábelezése között. végcsatlakozásánál kell mérni lefuttatni a
- 1. kép - (az összekötot kihúzni). diagnosztikai
Helyes az érték? - 13. kép - programot az
(26-28Ω / 230 V/1950 W, Helyes az érték? egyéb riasztások
28-31Ω / 240 V/1950 W) (26-28Ω / 230 V/1950 W, megállapításához.
28-31Ω / 240 V/1950 W)
ê IGEN
Megmérni a kábelezést a végcsatlakozók J2- A kábelezést kicserélni és újra
1 és J2-2 összekötok között. NEM lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
(lásd lap) – 1. kép – programot az egyéb riasztások
Zárva a kör? megállapításához.
ê IGEN
A zavarokat a futoegység okozhatja, amit a A futoegységet kicserélni és
szigetelo réteg elvesztése és a folap különös NEM újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
jelzése adhat. Ez a károsodás akkor lép fel, programot az egyéb riasztások
ha a futoegység forró. A diagnosztikai megállapításához.
programot újra lefuttatni - 6. fázis - , 2-4
percig várni.). Készüléket kikapcsolni és
ellenorizni, hogy nincs-e károsodás (15.
kép)? Rendben van a futoegység?
ê IGEN
Az elektronikus lapot kicserélni és újra
lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb

24
25
E35: Vízszint túl magas
E35 E35
Nyomásellenorzo túlfolyásvédelem több mint 15 mp-ig „tele” pozícióban van
(ha van)
Kikapcsolt készüléknél is A diagnosztikai Rendesen zár a Cserélje ki a

töltodik víz a gépbe? ciklust 8 fázisnál nyomásellenorzo nyomásellenorzot és
NEM bekapcsolni. Az NEM érintkezo? Víz nélkül NEM futtassa le újra a
ajtó zárása után megmérni a 31-32 diagnosztikai
még mindig víz érintkezo zárását (31- programot, az egyéb
töltodik a 34, ha van, nyitva). riasztások
készülékbe? megállapításához.
êIGEN ê IGEN ê IGEN
A vízbetölto elektromos Az elektronikus Rendben van a kábelezés? Cserélje (és/vagy
szelepet kicserélni és a lapot kicserélni és A J2-3 és a J6 között egy cserélje) ki a
diagnosztikai programot a diagnosztikai zárt kört mérni, ha a NEM kábelezést és
lefuttatni az egyéb programot nyomásellenorzo 31-32 futtassa le újra a
riasztások lefuttatni az egyéb között csatlakoztatva. (kör diagnosztikai
megállapításához. riasztások nyitva, ha a programot, az egyéb
megállapításához. nyomásellenorzo 31-34 riasztások
között csatlakoztatva). megállapításához.
A diagnosztikai program 2-es fázist bekapcsolni és a NEM Cserélje ki a nyomásellenorzot és futtassa le újra a
vizet az ablakig betöltodni hagyni. Zár a diagnosztikai programot, az egyéb riasztások
nyomásellenorzo 1-es szint érzékelo? (21-24 zárva). megállapításához.
êIGEN
A nyomásellenorzonél a kábelezést újra zárni. Ellenorizze, ill. cserélje ki a kábelezést és futtassa
Rendben van a kábelezés? NEM le újra a diagnosztikai programot, az egyéb
A J2-1 és J2-2 összekötok között egy zárt kört mérni, riasztások megállapításához.
- 1. kép -
êIGEN
Az elektronikus lapot kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a

26
E36 E36: A túlfutésvédelem-nyomásellenorzo „Sensing”-kör hibás E36
Az elektronikus lapot kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások megállapításához.
E37 E37: Az 1-es szint „Sensing”-kör hibás E37
E39 E39: A túlfolyásvédelem nyomásellenorzo „Sensing”HV-kör hibás E39

27
E41: Ajtó nyitása (elso rész – berendezés 3 érintkezovel)
E41 E41
Maximális ido túllépve (PTC=15 mp, azonnali ajtózárolás = minden 2. mp-ben)
Ajtót rendesen bezárni és újra

Rendesen be van zárva az ajtó? NEM lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
ê IGEN
3 érintkezo 4 érintkezos
hagyományos ajtózárolási (Azonnali ajtózárolás)
egység 3 vagy 4 érintkezos az ajtózárolás? - 8. kép, 30. oldal -
- 6. kép -
ê IGEN
A kábelezés ellenorzése, nyitott ajtónál Az összekötot kihúzni és az
megmérni a következo kábelezési alkatrészt mérni Az ajtózárolást
összekötéseket: (6. kép): kicserélni és újra
- J2-4 és J6-2 huzal között, a kör NEM lehet - a 3 és 5 összekötok között a lefuttatni a
nyitva (a PTC-rezisztencia értékét mérni) NEM kör nem lehet nyitva (egy NEM diagnosztikai
- J6-2 és J2-1 huzal között, a körnek határozott rezisztencia értékét programot az
NYITVA kell lenni mérni) egyéb riasztások
- a J2-1 összeköto (lap oldal) és a huzal - a 4 és 5 összekötok között a megállapításához.
közötti a mérésnél, ami az ajtózárolás 4 kör nem lehet nyitva (a
összekötohöz vezet (7. kép), egy ZÁRT kört számok az alkatrészekre
kell megállapítani. vannak nyomtatva).
Rendben van a rendszer? Rendben van az ajtózárolási
egység?
IGEN ê IGEN
A kábelezést
ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra
lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
Ellenorizni a kábelezést az ajtózárolás és a NEM Zárófogat/ajtót kicserélni.

zárófog között. Funkcionál a rendszer?
ê IGEN
Ajtózárolást kicserélni. NEM Az elektromos lapot kicserélni
Helyesen funkcionál a készülék? és újra lefuttatni a
diagnosztikai programot az
egyéb riasztások
megállapításához
ê IGEN
A diagnosztikai programot újra lefuttatni az
egyéb riasztások megállapításához.

28
29
E41: Ajtó nyitása (második rész – berendezés 4 érintkezovel)
E41 E41
Maximális ido túllépve (255 mp a PTC-nél / 5 impulzus az ajtózárolási rendszernél
4 érintkezos
Azonnali ajtózárolás egység
- 8. kép -
ê IGEN
A kábelezés ellenorzése, nyitott ajtónál Az ajtózárolás összekötot
megmérni a következo kábelezési kihúzni és az alkatrészt mérni Az ajtózárolást
összekötéseket (1. kép): - a 3 és 5 összekötok között a kicserélni és újra
- J2-4 és J6-2 huzal között, a kör NEM lehet kör NEM lehet nyitva (a PTC- lefuttatni a
nyitva (a PTC-rezisztencia értékét mérni) NEM rezisztencia értékét mérni) NEM diagnosztikai
- J6-2 és J2-1 huzal között, a körnek - a 2 és 4 összekötok között a programot az
NYITVA kell lenni kör NEM lehet nyitva (a PTC- egyéb riasztások
- a J2-1 összeköto (lap oldal) és a huzal rezisztencia értékét mérni) megállapításához.
közötti a mérésnél, ami az ajtózárolás 4 - a 4 és 5 összekötok között a
összekötohöz vezet, egy ZÁRT kört kell körnek NYITVA kell lenni (a
megállapítani. számok az alkatrészekre
(7. kép) vannak nyomtatva).
Rendben van a rendszer? Rendben van az ajtózárolási
egység? (8. kép)
IGEN ê IGEN
A kábelezést
A mechanikus összeköttetést az ajtózárolás NEM Zárófogat/ajtót kicserélni.

és a zárófog között ellenorizni. Funkcionál a
rendszer?
ê IGEN
egyéb riasztások
ê IGEN

30
31
E42: Probléma az ajtónyitásnál (elso rész – berendezés 3 érintkezovel)
E42 E42
3 érintkezos 4 érintkezos
hagyományos azonnali ajtózárolás egység 3 vagy 4 érintkezos az (azonnali
- 6. kép - ajtózárolás? ajtózárolás
egység)
- 6. kép -, 30. old.
ê IGEN
megmérni a következo kábelezési kihúzni és az alkatrészt mérni
összekötéseket (1. kép): (6. ábra): Az ajtózárolást
- J2-4 és J6-2 huzal között, a kör NEM lehet - a 3 és 5 összekötok között a kicserélni és újra
NEM NEM
nyitva (a PTC-rezisztencia értékét mérni) kör nem lehet nyitva (a PTC- lefuttatni a
- J6-2 és J2-1 huzal között, a körnek rezisztencia értékét mérni) diagnosztikai
NYITVA kell lenni - a 4 és 5 összekötok között a programot az
- a J2-1 összeköto (lap oldal) és a huzal körnek nyitva kell lenni (a egyéb riasztások
közötti a mérésnél, ami az ajtózárolás 4 számok az alkatrészekre megállapításához.
összekötohöz vezet, egy ZÁRT kört kell vannak nyomtatva).
megállapítani. Rendben van az ajtózárolási
(7. kép) egység?
Rendben van a rendszer?
IGEN ê IGEN
A kábelezést

rendszer?
ê IGEN
egyéb riasztások
ê IGEN

32
33
E42: Probléma az ajtónyitásnál (második rész – berendezés 4 érintkezovel)
E42 E42
4 érintkezos
azonnali ajtózárolás egység
- 8. kép -
ê IGEN
megmérni a következo kábelezési kihúzni és az alkatrészt mérni:
összekötéseket (1. kép): - a 3 és 5 összekötok között a Az ajtózárolást
- J2-5 és J6-2 huzal között, a kör NEM lehet kör NEM lehet nyitva (a PTC- kicserélni és újra
NEM NEM
nyitva (a PTC-rezisztencia értékét mérni) rezisztencia értékét mérni) lefuttatni a
- J2-4 és J6-2 huzal között, a kör nem lehet - a 2 és 4 összekötok között a diagnosztikai
NYITVA (a PTC-rezisztencia értékét mérni) kör NEM lehet nyitva (a PTC- programot az
- a J2-1 huzal és a huzal között, ami az rezisztencia értékét mérni) egyéb riasztások
ajtózárolás 5 összekötohöz vezet, egy ZÁRT - a 4 és 5 összekötok között a megállapításához.
kört kell megállapítani. körnek NYITVA kell lenni (a
(7. kép) számok az alkatrészekre
Rendben van a rendszer? vannak nyomtatva).
Rendben van az ajtózárolási
egység (8. kép)
IGEN ê IGEN
A kábelezést

rendszer?
ê IGEN
egyéb riasztások
ê IGEN

34
35
E43: Probléma az alkatrésznél (Triac), ami az ajtókéslelteto egységet vezérli – elso rész
E43 E43
- egység 3 érintkezovel -
3 érintkezo 3 vagy 4 érintkezos az 4 érintkezos

hagyományos ajtózárolási egység ajtózárolás? (azonnali
- 6. kép - ajtózárolás
egység)
- 6. kép -, 30. old.
ê IGEN
megmérni a következo kábelezési kihúzni és az alkatrészt mérni
összekötéseket (1. kép): (6. ábra): Az ajtózárolást
- J2-4 és J6-2 huzal között, a kör NEM lehet - a 3 és 5 összekötok között a kicserélni és újra
nyitva (a PTC-rezisztencia értékét mérni) kör nem lehet nyitva (a PTC- lefuttatni a
NEM NEM
- J6-2 és J2-1 huzal között, a körnek rezisztencia értékét mérni) diagnosztikai
NYITVA kell lenni - a 4 és 5 összekötok között a programot az
- a J2-1 összeköto (lap oldal) és a huzal körnek nyitva kell lenni (a egyéb riasztások
közötti a mérésnél, ami az ajtózárolás 4 számok az alkatrészekre megállapításához.
összekötohöz vezet, egy ZÁRT kört kell vannak nyomtatva).
megállapítani. Rendben van az ajtózárolási
Rendben van a rendszer? egység?
ê IGEN ê IGEN
Az elektromos lapot kicserélni és újra NEM A kábelezést
lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra
riasztások megállapításához. lefuttatni a diagnosztikai

36
37
E43: Probléma az alkatrésznél (Triac), ami az ajtókéslelteto egységet vezérli – elso rész
E43 E43
- egység 4 érintkezovel -
4 érintkezos
ajtózárolási egység
- 8. kép -
ê IGEN
megmérni a következo kábelezési kihúzni és az alkatrészt mérni:
összekötéseket (1. kép): - a 3 és 4 összekötok között a Az ajtózárolást
- J2-5 és J6-2 huzal között, a kör NEM lehet kör NEM lehet nyitva (a PTC- kicserélni és újra
nyitva (a PTC-rezisztencia értékét mérni) rezisztencia értékét mérni) lefuttatni a
NEM NEM
- J2-4 és J6-2 között a kör NEM lehet nyitva - a 2 és 4 összekötok között a diagnosztikai
(a PTC-rezisztencia értékét mérni), kör NEM lehet nyitva (a PTC- programot az
- a J2-1 huzal és a huzal között, ami az rezisztencia értékét mérni) egyéb riasztások
ajtózárolás 5 összekötohöz vezet, egy zárt - a 4 és 5 összekötok között a megállapításához.
kört kell megállapítani. (7. kép) körnek NYITVA kell lenni (a
Rendben van a rendszer? számok az alkatrészekre
vannak nyomtatva).
Rendben van az ajtózárolási
egység (8. kép)
ê IGEN ê IGEN
Az elektromos lapot kicserélni és újra NEM A kábelezést
lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra
riasztások megállapításához. lefuttatni a diagnosztikai

38
39
E44 E44: A zárt ajtó „Sensing” –kör hibás E44
Az elektromos lapot
kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a
egyéb riasztások
E45 E45: Probléma az alkatrész (Triac) „Sensing” –körnél, ami az ajtókésleltetési egységet E45
vezérli.
Az elektromos lapot
egyéb riasztások

40
E51: Triac motortáplálás rövidre van zárva
E51 E51
Aktivizálja a védorendszert a Triac rövidzár miatt (5 próbálkozás a programfutás alatt,
azonnal, ha a programindításnál, vagy a diagnosztikánál felismerte)
Mérés a J1 kábelezés végcsatlakozó NEM Az elektronikus lapnál kihúzott NEM Feltehetoen az

összeköto és a készülék kialakítás között. összekötovel J1, a E52 jelenik meg:
- lásd 1. kép és 9. – diagnosztikai fázis 8-at az összekötot újra
- Van veszteség? kiválasztani. csatlakoztatni kell
Újra megjelenik az E51 és a diagnosztikai
riasztás? programot
lefuttatni.
IGEN ê IGEN
Az elektromos lapot kicserélni
és újra lefuttatni a
egyéb riasztások
A motor összekötot kihúzni és mérni a motor A kábelezést

végcsatlakozó és a készüléktest között. NEM ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra
- Lásd 10. kép - lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
Van veszteség? programot az egyéb riasztások
ê IGEN Ha a folapon égési
A motort kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a nyomok vannak,
diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások akkor lásd a 62-64.
megállapításához. oldalt.
41
E52: Nem jelez a motor-tachogenerátor (elso rész)
E52 E52
Program blokkolása 5 próbálkozás után a programfutás alatt, azonnal, ha a
programindításnál, vagy a diagnosztikánál felismerte)
Válassza ki a diagnosztikai
programot 7-es fázis. A dob 50 A motor csak rövid A motor soha nem forog.
NEM NEM
ford/perc-cel forog az óra ideig mozog, majd - lásd 44. oldal -
járásával egyezo irányba és megáll.
250 ford/perc-cel az óra
járásával szemben. Helyesen
forog a dob?
ê IGEN ê IGEN
A motor
Mérés a kábelezés összekötot A motort, vagy a
összeköto NEM kihúzni és NEM tachométert
Valószínuleg a motorvédelem végcsatlakozó J5-3 megmérni a kicserélni és újra
megszólalt. A motor és J5-4 között. tachogenerátor lefuttatni a
kicserélése elott ellenorizni: Helyes a tekercset (Ω). diagnosztikai
tachogenerátor Lásd 11. kép. programot az
- hogy a nyomásellenorzo értéke (Ω)? Helyes az egyéb riasztások
vízkör rendben van-e (kis lyuk (Mint a 45. oldalon – érték? (Mint a megállapításához.
lehet a tömlon, hogy több víz 4. pont, „A”-fázis) 45. oldalon – 4.
folyt be és a motor pont, „A”-fázis)
túlmelegedett), IGEN ê IGEN
A kábelezést
- hogy a csapágy rendben van- ellenorizni /
e és a dob súrlódás nélkül kicserélni és
forog-e. újra lefuttatni a
diagnosztikai
- helyes-e a csatlakozó programot az
feszültség (olyan alacsony egyéb
feszültségnél, ami nem éri el az riasztások
EB3 riasztási határt, megállapítá-
lehetséges, hogy a motor nem sához.
indul).
Mérés a kábelezés Ellenorizni a A motort, vagy a
Újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai összeköto tachogenerátor tachométert
programot az egyéb riasztások végcsatlakozó (J5-3 NEM pozícióját. NEM kicserélni és újra
megállapításához. és J5-4) között és a lefuttatni a
készülék struktúra Rendben van? diagnosztikai
között. Van Lásd 12. kép. programot az
veszteség? egyéb riasztások
Lásd 9. kép. megállapításához.
ê IGEN ê IGEN
A kábelezést Az elektronikus
ellenorizni / folapot
kicserélni és újra kicserélni és
lefuttatni a újra lefuttatni a Ha a folapon égési
diagnosztikai diagnosztikai nyomok vannak,
programot az egyéb programot az akkor lásd a 62-64.
riasztások egyéb oldalt.
megállapításához. riasztások
megállapítá-
sához.
42
43
E52: Nem jelez a motor-tachogenerátor (második rész)
E52 E52
Program blokkolása 5 próbálkozás után a programfutás alatt, azonnal, ha a
programindításnál, vagy a diagnosztikánál felismerte)
A motor soha nem forog.

A kábelezés ellenorzéséhez
megmérni (Ω-11. kép) az
elektronikus lap összeköto
következo végcsatlakozóit (1.
kép) és a korrekt értékeket
összehasonlítani (lásd 45. NEM NEM
A motort a 45. oldal A motort kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a
oldal: 4. pont – a motor szerint ellenorizni. diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások
paramétere). megállapításához.
- J1-1 és J1-2 között az értéket Rendben van a
a 4-es pont – B (állórész) motor?
szerint kell mérni.
- J1-1 és J1-3 között (ha van)
az értéket a 4-es pont – E
(állórész ½ mezo) szerint kell
mérni.
- J1-4 és J1-5 között az értéket
a 4-es pont – D (rotor) szerint
kell mérni.
ê IGEN ê IGEN
Az elektronikus folapot A kábelezést
kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a ellenorizni /
diagnosztikai programot az kicserélni és újra Ha a folapon égési nyomok vannak, akkor
egyéb riasztások lefuttatni a lásd a 62-64. oldalt.
megállapításához. diagnosztikai
programot az egyéb
riasztások
44
Hogyan vezérel a kollektormotor
1. A csatlakozó blokkokat (kábelezés) és a meglévo
csúszó / hajlított végcsatlakozókat ellenorizni.
2. Ellenorizni, hogy vannak-e víznyomok /
vízmaradékok, vagy mosószer és megállapítani, hogy
ezek honnan származnak.
3. Ellenorizze, hogy a tekercselés földelése, vagy a
rosszul szigetelt részek földelése rendben van-e.
Legkisebb mérési értéket 40 MΩ-tól alkalmazni:
leolvasás az egyes végcsatlakozók és a ház között (10.
kép).
4. Az egyes tekercseket a következo táblázat szerint
ellenorizni (11. kép).
Motor végzáró Kontroll: Motor SOLE Motor F.H.P. Motor CE.SET.T.

kapocstábla (Ω) (Ω) (Ω)
A 3–4 Tachogenerátor 171 - 196 126 - 147 64 – 73
tekercselés 469 - 540
B 5 – 10 Stator hatás 1.0 – 2.2 1.0 – 3.0 1.0 – 2.0
(egész mezo)
C 6–7 Motor 0 0 0
túlfutésvédelem
D 8–9 Rotor tekercselés 1.5 – 3.0 1.5 – 3.0 1.5 – 3.0
E 1 – 10 Stator
tekercselés (fél 0.5 – 1.0 0.5 – 1.5 0.5 – 1.0
mezo,
meglévo
végzárás 1)
Megjegyzés: A rotortekercselés ellenorzésnél az összes profilt meg kell mérni. Eközben a tengelyt lassan forgatni
kell és a látható lamellák között ellenorizni kell a rövidzárat. A kefék zárt állapotát is ellenorizni kell.
45
E53 E53: Probléma az alkatrész (Triac) „Sensor”-körnél, ami a motort táplálja E53
Az elektronikus folapot kicserélni és újra

lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb

vannak, akkor lásd a 62-64.
oldalt
46
E54: Motorrelé érintkezok beragadva
E54 E54
Feszültségérték a motorkörnél, akkor is, ha ennek nem szabad funkcionálni
A J1 (1. kép) kábelezés összeköto minden végzárója és Az elektronikus folapot kicserélni és újra
a készülék szerkezete között mérni. NEM lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
Lásd 45. oldal, 3. pont. riasztások megállapításához.
Van veszteség?
Lásd 9. kép
IGEN
A motor összekötot kihúzni és mérni a motor végzáró NEM Az érintkezoket ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra
és a készülék test között. lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
Lásd 10. kép riasztások megállapításához.
Van veszteség?
IGEN
A motort kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai Ha a folapon égési nyomok vannak, akkor lásd a
programot az egyéb riasztások megállapításához. 62-64. oldalt
47
E61: Nem kielégíto felfutés a mosóprogram alatt
E61 E61
Maximális felfutési ido túllépve
Diagnosztikai programot Megmérni az ohm-értéket

bekapcsolni és a vizet az ajtóig közvetlenül a futoegység
hagyni befolyni, hogy zárjon a végzáróknál (összeköto
nyomásellenorzo érintkezo. kihúzva).
Megmérni a futoegység értéket Lásd 13. kép. A futoegységet kicserélni és újra
(Ω) és kábelezés J6-1 és J2-1 NEM Helyes az érték? lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
NEM
végzárók között. (26-28Ω 230V/1950W-hoz, programot az egyéb riasztások
Lásd 1. kép. 28-31Ω 240V/1950W-hoz.) megállapításához.
Helyes az érték?
(26-28Ω 230V/1950W-hoz,
28-31Ω 240V/1950W-hoz.)
IGEN ê IGEN
Mérni a nyomásellenorzo A nyomásellenorzot kicserélni és
érintkezok 11-14 és 21-24 NEM újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
között. programot az egyéb riasztások
4. kép. megállapításához.
Mindkét érintkezo zárva van?
ê IGEN
A kábelezést
programot az egyéb
– Más esetben egy normális
programot beállítani és a
hofokot közvetlenül az ajtónál
érzékelni.
Megmérni az NTC-szonda Összekötot kihúzni és

értéket és az elektronikus lap megmérni az értéket
összeköto J5-1 és J5-2 közvetlenül az NTC- Az NTC-hofokszondát kicserélni
érintkezok között. szondánál. és újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
NEM NEM
Helyes az érték? Helyes az érték? programot az egyéb riasztások
(20oC-nál 5.7 és 6.3KΩ között, Lásd 14. kép megállapításához.
60oC-nál 1220 és 1280Ω (20oC-nál 5.7 és 6.3KΩ
között) között,)
ê IGEN ê IGEN

kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra
diagnosztikai programot az lefuttatni a diagnosztikai Ha a folapon égési nyomok
egyéb riasztások programot az egyéb vannak, akkor lásd a 62-64. oldalt
megállapításához. riasztások megállapításához.
48
49
E62: Túlfelfutés a mosóprogram alatt
E62 E62
Az NTC-szonda homérséklete több mint 5 percig 88oC fölött van.
Diagnosztikai programot Összekötot kihúzni és mérni

bekapcsolni és a vizet az ajtóig a futoegység és a
hagyni befolyni, hogy zárjon a földérintkezo között.
nyomásellenorzo érintkezo. Lásd 15. kép. A futoegységet kicserélni és újra
Mérni a kábelezés összeköto Nyitva van a kör? lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
NEM NEM
J2-2 (1. kép) és a készülék programot az egyéb riasztások
szerkezet között. megállapításához.
Lásd 9. kép.
Nyitva van a kör?
IGEN ê IGEN
A kábelezést
programot az egyéb
A mérést a J2-2 és a
készülék szerkezet között
megismételni, miközben a
futoegység összekötot újra
csatlakoztatni.
Megmérni az NTC-szonda Összekötot kihúzni és

értéket és az elektronikus lap megmérni az értéket
összeköto J4-1 és J4-2 közvetlenül az NTC- Az NTC-hofokszondát kicserélni
érintkezok között. szondánál. és újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai
NEM NEM
Helyes az érték? Helyes az érték? programot az egyéb riasztások
(20oC-nál 5.7 és 6.3KΩ között, Lásd 14. kép megállapításához.
60oC-nál 1220 és 1280Ω (20oC-nál 5.7 és 6.3KΩ
között) között)
ê IGEN ê IGEN

kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra
diagnosztikai programot az lefuttatni a diagnosztikai Ha a folapon égési nyomok
egyéb riasztások programot az egyéb vannak, akkor lásd a 62-64. oldalt
megállapításához. riasztások megállapításához.
50
51
E66: A futoegység relé érintkezo mindig zárva
E66 E66
Mérni a folap összeköto J2-2 és a készülék szerkezet NEM Az elektronikus folapot kicserélni és újra
között. lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
(1. és 9. kép. Van veszteség? riasztások megállapításához.
ê IGEN
Összekötot kihúzni és mérni a futoegység és a NEM A futoegységet kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a
földérintkezo között. diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások
Lásd 15. kép. megállapításához.
Nyitva van a kör?
ê IGEN
A kábelezést ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a Ha a folapon égési nyomok vannak, akkor lásd a
diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások 62-64. oldalt
52
E71: Mosóprogram NTC-szonda zavar
E71 E71
Feszültség a határértéken kívül (rövidzár vagy nyitás)
Bekapcsolni a fázis 6 diagnosztikai Összekötot kihúzni és mérni Az NTC-hofokszondát

programot és megvárni, amíg a víz közvetlenül az NTC- kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a
befolyik a készülékbe. Készüléket NEM szondánál. NEM diagnosztikai programot az
kikapcsolni és megmérni az NTC- Helyes az érték? egyéb riasztások
szonda és a kábelezés összeköto Lásd 14. kép megállapításához.
J5-1 és J5-2 érintkezok közötti (20oC-nál 5.7 és 6.3KΩ)
értéket (1. kép).
Helyes az érték?
(20oC-nál 5.7 és 6.3KΩ között)
IGEN ê IGEN
A kábelezést ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a
Mérni az összeköto J5-1, J5-2 végzárók és a készülék NEM Az elektronikus folapot kicserélni és újra
szerkezet között. lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
(lásd 9. kép) riasztások megállapításához.
ê IGEN
Összekötot kihúzni és mérni közvetlenül az NTC- NEM A kábelezést ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra
szonda végzárók és a készülék szerkezet között. lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
(az öblíto tartályban víznek kell lenni). riasztások megállapításához.
Van veszteség?
ê IGEN
Az NTC-hoérzékelo szondát kicserélni és újra lefuttatni Ha a folapon égési nyomok vannak, akkor lásd a
a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások 62-64. oldalt
53
E82: Hiba a programválasztó törlés/ki pozíció kiolvasásánál
E82 E82
A programválasztó „0”-pozíció kiolvasása, ha a készülék be van kapcsolva, vagy
konfigurációs hiba
Készüléket kikapcsolni A mosógépet bekapcsolni, a

(programválasztó a „0” programválasztót mindegyik
pozícióban). pozícióra forgatni: minden
NEM NEM
Világít valamelyik LED? állásban legalább 10 mp-et A diagnosztikai programot újra
várni a következo lefuttatni az egyéb riasztások
továbbkapcsolás elott. megállapításához.
Újra fellép az E82 riasztás?
ê IGEN ê IGEN
Az elektronikus folapot Az elektronikus folapot
kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a
diagnosztikai programot az diagnosztikai programot az
egyéb riasztások egyéb riasztások
megállapításához. megállapításához.
E83: Hiba a programválasztó kód kiolvasásánál

E83 E83
A konfigurációs adatok programválasztó állásának kódja nincs meg, vagy konfigurációs hiba
A mosógépet bekapcsolni, a
programválasztót mindegyik
pozícióra forgatni: minden A diagnosztikai programot
NEM
állásban legalább 10 mp-et újra lefuttatni az egyéb
várni a következo riasztások megállapításához.
továbbkapcsolás elott.
Újra fellép az E83 riasztás?
ê IGEN
Az elektronikus folapot
egyéb riasztások
54
E93: Készülék konfigurációs hiba
E93 E93
A készülék bekapcsolásánál következetlenség a konfigurációs értéknél
Hibás konfiguráció lehetséges.

Az elektronikus folapot kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások
E94: Mosóprogram konfigurációs hiba

E94 E94
A készülék bekapcsolásánál következetlenség a konfigurációs értéknél

E95: Kommunikációs hiba a mikroprocesszor és a programtároló lap (EEPROM) között

E95 E95
Hiba lépett fel az EEPROM kiolvasásánál/írásánál

E96: Következetlenség a kezelopanel verzió és a konfigurációs adatok között

E96 E96
Nincs egybeesés a konfigurációs adatok és a készülék bekapcsolásnál a kezelopanel
típusazonosító adatok között (függoleges – vízszintes gombelrendezés)

E97: Következetlenség a programválasztó verzió és a konfigurációs adatok között

E97 E97
Nincs egybeesés a program konfigurációs adatok és a választó kapcsoló azonosító adatok
között

55
EA1: Hibás a dobpozíció szabályzó rendszer DSP (felültöltos)
EA1 EA1
Hiba, vagy több mint 10 mp-ig tartó szenzor-jelzés a motor dobpozíció bekapcsolásnál
Rendben van a szíj? Ha a szíj rendben van, helyesen NEM A szíjat/tárcsát kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a
van-e pozícionálva a ferritlap? diagnosztikai programot az egyéb riasztások
ê IGEN
Összekötot kihúzni és közvetlenül mérni az érzékelonél: NEM A pozícionáló szenzort kicserélni és újra
- Kör zárva, ha a tárcsa normális részénél található (18. lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
kép) – Kör nyitva, ha a lemezkénél található (17. ábra). riasztások megállapításához.
Muködik a szenzor?
ê IGEN
Az összekötot újra zárni és mérni a kábelezés NEM A kábelezést ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra
összeköto J5-5 és J4-1 között: ha a dob forog, a körnek lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
nyitni és zárni kell. Ugyanazon érintkezok között riasztások megállapításához.
ellenorizni, hogy nincs-e veszteség a fenéknél.
ê IGEN
A diagnosztikai programot bekapcsolni (fázis 9). Ha
ismét fellép az EA1 riasztás, akkor az elektronikus lapot Ha a folapon égési nyomok vannak, akkor lásd a
kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az 62-64. oldalt
56
EB1: Hibás hálózati frekvencia
EB1 EB1
Tápfrekvencia a konfigurációs értéken kívüli
Figyelem!
A készülék addig marad riasztó állapotban, amíg a frekvencia újra el nem éri a helyes értéket, vagy amíg nincs
kikapcsolás (programválasztó „0”-pozícióban). Csak riasztási csoport kerül kijelzésre. A diagnosztikai programot
nem lehet újra lehívni. Az állandó riasztást csak akkor lehet kiolvasni, ha feloldásra kerül a riasztási helyzet.
Áramteljesítmény zavar, vagy a hálózati frekvencia a NEM Az elektronikus folapot kicserélni és újra
határértéken kívül van? lefuttatni a diagnosztikai programot az egyéb
ê IGEN
A ház elektromos erosítojét ellenorizni/kijavítani.
EB2: Túl magas csatlakozó feszültség

EB2 EB2
A csatlakozó feszültség magasabb, mint a konfigurációs érték (hosszabb, mint 10 mp)
Figyelem!
Áramteljesítmény zavar, vagy a hálózati feszültség a NEM Az elektronikus folapot kicserélni és újra
ê IGEN
EB3: Túl alacsony csatlakozó feszültség

EB3 EB3
A csatlakozó feszültség alacsonyabb, mint a konfigurációs érték
Figyelem!
Áramteljesítmény zavar, vagy a hálózati frekvencia a NEM Az elektronikus folapot kicserélni és újra
ê IGEN
57
6 KAPCSOLÁSI TERV
6.1 Azonnali ajtózárás vázlat
58
6.2 Ajtószerkezet PTC-vel vázlat
59
6.2.1 Kapcsolási vázlat – jelmagyarázat
Elektronikus alkatrészek Elektronikus lap alkatrészek

1. Elektronikus lap DOOR_TY Triac ajtó biztonsági egység
2. Zavarszuro DRAIN_TY Triac öblíto szivattyú
3. Fokapcsoló (a programválasztón) K1 Futoegység relé
4. Ajtó biztonsági egység K2 Motorrelé: rotáció óra járása szerint
5. Nyomásellenorzo 1. szint K3 Motorrelé: rotáció az óra járásával ellentétesen
6. Nyomásellenorzo túlfutésvédelem K4 Motorrelé: Fél mezo táplálás (néhány modell)
7. Nyomásellenorzo túlfolyásvédelem (néhány modell) MOTOR_TY Triac motor
8. Futoegység ON/OFF Fokapcsoló (programválasztó)
9. Stator (motor) PWELW_TY Triac elektromos szelep elomosás
10. Túlfutésvédelem (motor) Serial interface Soros aszinkron csatlakozó
11. Tachogenerátor (motor) WELV_TY Triac elektromos szelep fomosás
12. Rotor (motor)
13. Öblíto szivattyú
14. Elektromos szelep elomosás
15. Elektromos szelep fomosás
16. Ajtózárás lámpa (néhány modell)
17. Dobpozicionáló szenzor DSP (felültöltos – néhány modell)
60
7 ELEKTRONIKUS LAP ÖSSZEKÖTOK
J6 J2 J1 J3 J4 J5 J7
J6-1: Futoegység (relé) J2-1: Ajtó biztonsági J1-1: Motor (Triac) J3-1: Öblíto szivattyú J4-1: Ajtózárolás J5-1: NTC-hoérzékelo Soros csatlakozó:
J6-2: Ajtó biztonsági egység (vezeték- J1-2: Motor (stator- (vezeték) ellenorzo lámpa J5-2: NTC-hoérzékelo
egység (vezeték) sensing) egész mezo) J3-2: Elektromos J4-1: Ajtózárolás J5-3: Motor J7-1 ASY_IN
J8 J2-2: 1.szint (sensing) J1-3: Motor (stator-1/2 szelep (vezeték) ellenorzo lámpa (tachogenerátor) J7-2 ASY_OUT
J8-1: Vezeték J2-3: Túlfolyásvédelem mezo) J3-3: (vezeték) J5-4: Motor J7-3 5V
J8-2: Vezeték nyomásellenorzo J1-4: Motor (rotor) J3-4: Öblíto szivattyú (tachogenerátor) J7-4 GND
(nullvezeték) J2-4: Ajtó biztonsági J1-5: Motor (rotor) (Triac) J5-5: (Dobpozícionáló
egység (Triac) J3-5: Elektromos DSP)
J2-5: Ajtó biztonsági szelep elomosás (triac)
egység J3-6: Elektromos
J2-6: Túlfolyásvédelem szelep fomosás (triac)
nyomásellenorzo J3-7: Elektromos
szelep (vezeték)
J3-8: (Nincs használva)
61
8 ÉGÉSI NYOMOK AZ ELEKTRONIKUS FOLAPON
Ha az elektronikus folapon égési nyomokat találhatók, akkor ellenorizni kell, hogy a problémát nem-e egy másik elektromos alkatrész okozta (rövidzár, rossz
szigetelés, lyukadás). Használja a következo képeket az égési nyomok által behatárolt területe szerint, hogy meghatározható legyen az az alkatrész, ami az
üzemzavart okozta.
A lapok a legtöbb alkatrésszel vannak ábrázolva; más lapoknál néhány alkatrész hiányzik (K4 relé és buzzer).
8.1 Alkatrészoldal képe (mindkét változat egyforma)
1. Mosóprogram NTC-hofokszonda terület 5. Futoegység terület

2. Öblíto szivattyú terület 6. Ajtózároló egység terület
3. Tápterület 7. Vízfeltöltés elektronikus szelep terület
4. Motor terület 8. Tachogenerátor (motor) terület
9. Dobpozícionáló terület (felültöltos)
62
8.2 Szerelési-oldal képe (vízszintes gombelrendezés)
1. ---- 5. Futoegység terület

63
8.3 Szerelésoldal képe (függoleges gombelrendezés)
1. ---- 5. Futoegység terület

64
SERVICE MANUAL
LAUNDRY
Washing machines &

Dryers
 ELECTROLUX ZANUSSI S.p.A. P6000 (Nexus) Series:
Spares Operations Italy Publication
Corso Lino Zanussi,30 number
Structural characteristics,
I - 33080 PORCIA /PN (ITALY) 599 35 23-17
electrical components and
Fax +39 0434 394096 EN accessibility
Edition: 2002-05-02 Production: ZP - Porcia Italy
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 1 599 35 23-17

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 PURPOSE OF THIS SERVICE MANUAL ............................................................................................... 7

2 IMPORTANT NOTES .............................................................................................................................. 7
3 WASHING PRINCIPLES ......................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 Washing ........................................................................................................................................... 8
3.1.1 Results of the wash................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 Fabrics ............................................................................................................................................. 9
3.2.1 Natural and artificial fibres......................................................................................................... 9
3.2.2 Washing the various types of fibres........................................................................................... 9
3.2.3 Washing animal fibres: .............................................................................................................. 9
3.2.4 International symbols for washing of fabrics............................................................................ 10
3.3 Classification of soiling ................................................................................................................... 11
3.4 Mechanical action .......................................................................................................................... 11
3.5 Duration of the washing cycle......................................................................................................... 11
3.6 Water ............................................................................................................................................. 12
3.6.1 Formation of lime scale and ferrous oxide............................................................................... 12
3.6.2 Hardness of the water ............................................................................................................. 12
3.6.3 Total water hardness............................................................................................................... 13
3.7 Detergents ..................................................................................................................................... 14
3.7.1 Composition of a detergent ..................................................................................................... 14
3.7.2 Functions of the principal components of a detergent ............................................................. 14
3.7.3 Functions of other components of a detergent ........................................................................ 15
3.7.4 Detergent quantities ................................................................................................................ 16
3.7.5 Washing additives ................................................................................................................... 17
3.7.6 Bleaching ................................................................................................................................ 17
3.8 The function of the water temperature............................................................................................ 18
3.8.1 Using the correct temperature................................................................................................. 18
3.9 Washing machine programmes...................................................................................................... 19
4 FRONT-LOADING WASHING MACHINE ............................................................................................. 20
4.1 Traditional washing system ............................................................................................................ 20
4.1.1 Recovery of detergent loss from the circulation hose .............................................................. 21
4.2 Drain circuit with "ECO-BALL" ball valve ........................................................................................ 22
4.2.1 “ECO-BALL” ball valve ............................................................................................................ 22
4.2.2 Ball valve: operating principle.................................................................................................. 23
4.3 “JETSYSTEM” washing system ..................................................................................................... 24
4.3.1 JETSYSTEM hydraulic circuit (first version) ............................................................................ 24
4.3.2 Jetsystem “DIRECT SPRAY” washing system ........................................................................ 25
4.3.3 Circuit with heat exchanger ..................................................................................................... 25
4.3.4 “NEW JET” recirculation circuit–P63BD version (large door)................................................... 26
5 WASHER-DRYERS .............................................................................................................................. 27
5.1 Drying system ................................................................................................................................ 27
5.2 Drying circuit (type "A" condenser) ................................................................................................. 27
5.3 Drying circuit (type "B" condenser) ................................................................................................. 28
5.3.1 “HP” version ............................................................................................................................ 28
6 STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICS.................................................................................................... 29
6.1 “NEXUS” technology ...................................................................................................................... 29
6.1.1 Washing machine with 32 cm-depth cabinet ........................................................................... 30
6.2 Base............................................................................................................................................... 30
6.3 Control panel support ..................................................................................................................... 30
6.4 Cabinet........................................................................................................................................... 31
6.4.1 Types of cabinet...................................................................................................................... 31
6.5 Porthole door.................................................................................................................................. 33
6.5.1 Examples of porthole doors..................................................................................................... 33
6.5.2 Porthole door with button-actioned aperture............................................................................ 34
6.6 Control panel.................................................................................................................................. 35
6.6.1 Examples of control panels ..................................................................................................... 35
6.7 Washing groups ............................................................................................................................. 36
6.7.1 Damper ................................................................................................................................... 36
6.7.2 Types of washing groups ........................................................................................................ 37
6.7.3 Washing group in Carboran .................................................................................................... 38
6.7.4 Stainless steel washing group................................................................................................. 39
6.7.5 Drum ....................................................................................................................................... 40
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 2 599 35 23-17

6.7.6 Drum rotation drive belt ........................................................................................................... 41
6.8 Detergent dispenser ....................................................................................................................... 42
6.8.1 Detergent dispenser with distribution levers ............................................................................ 42
6.8.2 Detergent dispenser with multiple-outlet solenoid valve ("long" version) ................................. 44
6.8.3 Detergent dispenser with multiple-outlet solenoid valve ("short" version)................................ 46
6.9 Drain/circulation circuits ................................................................................................................. 48
6.9.1 Washers with traditional washing systems .............................................................................. 48
6.9.2 Washers with traditional washing system and “ECO-BALL” ball valve .................................... 49
6.9.3 Washers with traditional washing system and “P66" (32 cm) cabinet...................................... 50
6.9.4 Jetsystem washing machines (with circulation pump) ............................................................. 51
6.9.5 “NEW JET” circulation circuit (Circulation pump) – version P63BD ......................................... 52
6.9.6 Jetsystem washing machines (Circulation pump) with Heat exchanger .................................. 53
6.9.7 Jetsystem washing machines with NEAT cabinet (JETSY- IZ)................................................ 54
7 WASHER-DRYER COMPONENTS ...................................................................................................... 55
7.1 Fan assembly................................................................................................................................. 55
7.2 Heater element casing ................................................................................................................... 56
7.3 Drying condenser ........................................................................................................................... 57
7.3.1 Determining the drying time .................................................................................................... 58
7.3.2 Condensation water fill............................................................................................................ 59
7.4 Duct................................................................................................................................................ 59
8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.............................................................................................................. 60
8.1 Control systems ............................................................................................................................. 60
8.2 Suppressor..................................................................................................................................... 61
8.2.1 General characteristics ........................................................................................................... 61
8.2.2 Electrical symbols ................................................................................................................... 61
8.2.3 Circuit diagrams ...................................................................................................................... 61
8.2.4 Checking for efficiency ............................................................................................................ 61
8.3 Push-button.................................................................................................................................... 62
8.3.2 Electrical symbol ..................................................................................................................... 62
8.4 Door safety interlock (traditional version) ....................................................................................... 63
8.4.4 Version with pneumatic device................................................................................................ 64
8.5 Instantaneous door safety interlock................................................................................................ 65
8.5.2 Operating principle .................................................................................................................. 65
8.5.4 Circuit diagram ........................................................................................................................ 66
8.6 Solenoid valve................................................................................................................................ 67
8.7 Pressure switch.............................................................................................................................. 69
8.7.2 Pressure switch hydraulic circuit ............................................................................................ 69
8.7.5 Circuit diagram ........................................................................................................................ 70
8.8 Analogue (electronic) pressure switch............................................................................................ 71
8.8.4 Circuit diagrams and operating frequency ............................................................................... 72
8.9 Water distributor............................................................................................................................. 73
8.9.4 Contact closure diagram ......................................................................................................... 74
8.10 Induction (asynchronous) motors .................................................................................................. 75
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 3 599 35 23-17

8.10.2 Reversal of direction of rotation during washing...................................................................... 76
8.10.5 Motor with speed variator ........................................................................................................ 77
8.11 Commutator motor ........................................................................................................................ 78
8.11.4 Circuit diagram ........................................................................................................................ 81
8.12 AC/DC converter ........................................................................................................................... 82
8.12.3 Circuit diagram ........................................................................................................................ 82
8.13 Heating element ............................................................................................................................ 83
8.14 Heat exchanger ............................................................................................................................. 85
8.14.1 General characteristics .......................................................................................................... 85
8.15 Drying heater (washer-dryers)....................................................................................................... 86
8.16 Bi-metal thermostats ..................................................................................................................... 87
8.16.4 Manual-reset thermostat ......................................................................................................... 87
8.17 Adjustable thermostat.................................................................................................................... 88
8.18 NTC temperature sensor ............................................................................................................... 89
8.19 Drain pump.................................................................................................................................... 90
8.20 Circulation pump ........................................................................................................................... 91
8.21 Drying timer (washer-dryers) ......................................................................................................... 92
8.21.2 Circuit diagram ........................................................................................................................ 92
8.21.3 Contact closure diagram ......................................................................................................... 92
8.22 Fan motor (washer-dryers) ............................................................................................................ 93
8.23 Circuit diagrams ............................................................................................................................ 94
8.23.1 Wiring diagram ........................................................................................................................ 94
8.23.2 Basic circuit diagram ............................................................................................................... 96
9 ACCESS TO COMPONENTS ............................................................................................................... 97
9.1 Work-top ........................................................................................................................................ 97
9.1.1 Pressure switch....................................................................................................................... 97
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 4 599 35 23-17

9.1.2 Suppressor/motor capacitor .................................................................................................... 97
9.1.3 Solenoid valve (version fitted to the cabinet) ........................................................................... 97
9.1.4 Solenoid valve (version fitted to detergent dispenser) ............................................................. 97
9.2 Control panel (standard version) .................................................................................................... 98
9.2.1 Control panel – versions for “soft” cabinet ............................................................................... 98
9.2.2 Control panel – versions for “square” cabinets ........................................................................ 98
9.2.3 Timer....................................................................................................................................... 99
9.2.4 Water distribution camme........................................................................................................ 99
9.2.5 Detergent dispenser lever mechanism feeler arm ................................................................... 99
9.2.6 Push-button............................................................................................................................. 99
9.2.7 Adjustable thermostat ............................................................................................................. 99
9.3 Electronic control systems............................................................................................................ 100
9.3.1 Main PCB (MWM-EWM2000) ............................................................................................... 100
9.3.2 Control/display board ............................................................................................................ 100
9.3.3 Control panel – “input” version .............................................................................................. 100
9.3.4 Electronic pressure switch..................................................................................................... 100
9.4 Access from the porthole door...................................................................................................... 101
9.4.1 Porthole door ........................................................................................................................ 101
9.4.2 Porthole door hinge............................................................................................................... 101
9.4.3 Door safety interlock ............................................................................................................. 101
9.4.4 Bellows seal .......................................................................................................................... 101
9.5 Rear cabinet shell ........................................................................................................................ 102
9.5.1 Motor..................................................................................................................................... 102
9.5.2 Electronic speed control system / AC/DC converter .............................................................. 102
9.5.3 Thermostat/NTC sensor ........................................................................................................ 103
9.5.4 Heating element .................................................................................................................... 103
9.5.5 Detergent dispenser.............................................................................................................. 104
9.5.6 Removing the duct from the dispenser.................................................................................. 104
9.5.7 Water distributor.................................................................................................................... 104
9.5.8 Adjusting the dispenser levers .............................................................................................. 105
9.5.9 Damper ................................................................................................................................. 105
9.5.10 Drum pulley........................................................................................................................... 105
9.5.11 Pressure chamber................................................................................................................. 105
9.6 Washing group (Carboran-inox) ................................................................................................... 106
9.7 Drum and tub shells (Carboran) ................................................................................................... 106
9.7.1 Drum shaft bearings.............................................................................................................. 106
9.7.2 Drum spider .......................................................................................................................... 106
9.7.3 Front counterweight (Carboran tub) ...................................................................................... 107
9.7.4 Rear counterweight (Carboran tub) ....................................................................................... 107
9.8 Components of stainless steel tubs.............................................................................................. 107
9.8.1 Tub spider ............................................................................................................................. 107
9.8.2 Drum shaft bearings.............................................................................................................. 107
9.8.3 Tub support band .................................................................................................................. 108
9.8.4 Drum ..................................................................................................................................... 108
9.8.5 Replacing the stainless steel tub ........................................................................................... 108
9.8.6 Rear counterweight ............................................................................................................... 108
9.9 Drum lifter .................................................................................................................................... 109
9.10 Access to the pumps/manifolds ................................................................................................... 110
9.10.1 Drain pump (standard version).............................................................................................. 110
9.10.2 Drain pump - models with P66 (32cm) cabinet...................................................................... 110
9.10.3 Drain pump - models with RIM and P63 soft BD cabinets ..................................................... 110
9.10.4 Drain pump - models with Neat cabinet (Jetsy- IZ)................................................................ 111
9.10.5 Circulation pump (standard version)...................................................................................... 111
9.10.6 Circulation pump - “New Jet” version .................................................................................... 111
9.10.7 Filter/pump assembly - models with Neat cabinet (Jetsy- IZ) ................................................ 111
9.10.8 Circulation pump - models with Neat cabinet (Jetsy- IZ) ....................................................... 111
9.10.9 Drain filter body (standard version) ....................................................................................... 112
9.10.10 Heat exchanger (certain Jetsystem models only)................................................................. 112
9.10.11 Base .................................................................................................................................... 112
9.11 Front cabinet shell ....................................................................................................................... 113
9.12 Access to specific washer-dryer components.............................................................................. 114
9.12.1 Bellows seal and drying duct................................................................................................. 114
9.12.2 Rear cabinet shell ................................................................................................................. 115
9.12.3 Motor-Fan assembly ............................................................................................................. 115
9.12.4 Motor / Fan............................................................................................................................ 115
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 5 599 35 23-17

9.12.5 Drying heater casing ............................................................................................................. 116
9.12.6 Drying heaters....................................................................................................................... 116
9.12.7 Drying and safety thermostats............................................................................................... 116
9.12.8 Temperature sensor / Safety thermostat ............................................................................... 116
9.12.9 Drying condenser .................................................................................................................. 116
9.12.10 NTC sensor for control of drying times (models with electronic control)............................... 116
10 TOOLS AND MATERIALS ............................................................................................................... 117
10.1 Standard tools ............................................................................................................................. 117
10.2 Materials...................................................................................................................................... 118
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 6 599 35 23-17

1 PURPOSE OF THIS SERVICE MANUAL
The purpose of this Service Manual is to provide Service Engineers, who already have the basic knowledge
necessary to repair household washing machines, with information of a general nature regarding the P6000
(Nexus) range of washing machines.
More detailed information regarding specific models may be found in the Service Notes and Service
Manuals (issued separately) for each specific model or functionality.
This information covers:
Circuit diagrams
Timer diagrams
Exploded diagrams of spare parts
Lists of spare parts
Functions and diagnostics.
2 IMPORTANT NOTES
Repairs to electrical appliances must be effected only by qualified personnel.
Before accessing the components inside the appliance, always remove the plug from the power socket.
Where possible, ohmic measurements should be effected rather than direct measurement of voltage
and current.
Functional operation of the appliance may be checked when the rear panel has been removed.
However, under no circumstances must a spin cycle be performed with washing in the drum. In addition,
spin tests without washing must be performed with care and for short periods only. The front panel alone
is not sufficient to maintain the balance of the appliance during spinning.
Certain metal components inside the appliance may have sharp edges. Care should be taken to avoid
cuts or abrasions.
Before laying the appliance on the floor, always drain any water by removing the filter or laying the drain
hose flat on the floor.
Never lay the appliance on its right side (i.e. timer / electronic control unit side); this would cause the
water in the detergent dispenser to fall onto electrical components, thus damaging them.
After removing the rear panel of the cabinet, the appliance should be laid down on the front panel only,
preferably placing a sheet of cardboard on the floor to protect the paintwork.
After removing the rear panel from the appliance, Important!

it is necessary to cover the two extremities of the
upper cross-member with protective material, for
example by wrapping them in a cloth or fitting the
terminal section of the drain hose. This precaution
is necessary because the edges of the brackets
are sharp, and might otherwise cause injury to the
head when working on the appliance from the
rear.
After repairing the appliance, always perform the

final tests.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 7 599 35 23-17

3 WASHING PRINCIPLES
3.1 Washing
The washing of the fabrics consists of transferring the dirt from the
fabrics to the water, and is achieved using the following:
detergent
mechanical action
temperature
time
The washing operation comprises four phases:
1. Soaking (the fabrics must be completely soaked).

2. Dispersal of the dirt (which must be separated from the fabrics).
3. Suspension of the dirt (once removed from the fabrics, the dirt must not re-deposit, but must be held in
suspension).
4. Elimination of the dirt by means of draining and rinses.
3.1.1 Results of the wash
In order to obtain satisfactory washing results, it is necessary to know:
♦ the nature of the fibres
♦ the nature of the soiling
♦ the hardness of the water
♦ the products used for the wash (detergent, conditioners, bleach etc.)
and then to select the appropriate washing cycles.
The results of the wash depend on a number of factors:
• type of fabric
• type of water
• type of soiling
• type and quantity of detergent
• temperature of the water
• efficiency of the rinses
• time and speed of the spin cycles
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 8 599 35 23-17

3.2 Fabrics
3.2.1 Natural and artificial fibres
NATURAL FIBRES
Wool
ANIMAL FIBRES Special wool
Silk
Cotton
Linen
CELLULOSE VEGETABLE FIBRES Canapa
Hemp
Ramie
ARTIFICIAL FIBRES
Viscosa rayon
Cupro rayon
Special rayons
ARTIFICIAL CHEMICAL FIBRES
Rayon and polynosics
Acetate rayon
Triacetate rayon
Polyammide fibres
Polyurethane fibres
SYNTHETIC CHEMICAL FIBRES Polyureic fibres
Polyester fibres
Polytechnical fibres
3.2.2 Washing the various types of fibres
3.2.3 Washing animal fibres:
Neutral detergents
Greater quantity of water
Maximum temperature 40°C
Minimum mechanical agitation, short times
Cellulose vegetable fibres:
Alkaline (Base) detergents

Bleach (if used): Sodium hypochlorite (NaClo)
High water temperature (if OK for coloureds; for linen, if heavily soiled, bleaching is preferable to
washing at high temperatures).
Normal quantity of water
Vigorous and prolonged mechanical action
Spinning
Artificial chemical fibres:
Neutral detergents
Less mechanical action and minimum spinning
Greater quantity of water
Maximum temperature: 70°C (whites), 50°C (coloureds); bleach with a diluted solution of Sodium
hypochlorite (NaClo) and hydrogen peroxide (H2O2)
Synthetic chemical fibres:
Stronger detergents
Maximum temperature 40-60°C
Short wash
Medium spin speed
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 9 599 35 23-17

3.2.4 International symbols for washing of fabrics
Labels marked with the following symbols are affixed to the garments, and provide valuable information
relative to their treatment.
WASHING
ACTION
Wash at Wash at Wash at Wash at

NORMAL
95°C 60°C 40°C 30°C
Delicate
hand-wash DO NOT
WASH
DELICATE
BLEACH May be bleached in COLD water DO NOT BLEACH
Hot iron Medium iron Cool iron DO NOT IRON

IRONING max 200°C max 150°C max 110°C
DRY- DO NOT DRY-

CLEANING These symbols are used by the dry-cleaner to identify the CLEAN
correct solvent and cleaning process for each garment to be
dry-cleaned
Normal temperature
Reduced temperature
DRYING
Can be dried in a tumble-dryer DO NOT DRY IN A TUMBLE-DRYER
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 10 599 35 23-17

3.3 Classification of soiling
The dirt in the fabrics consists essentially of:
PROTEICN-BASED substances
OXIDABLE substances
GREASE
VARIOUS substances
CHEMICAL substances
Protein soiling (enzymatic) - sensitive to ENZYMES
Blood, Eggs, Chocolate, Grass etc.
Oxidable substances - sensitive to BLEACH
Wine, Tea, Coffee, Fruit etc.
Greasy soiling - sensitive to SURFACE-ACTIVE AGENTS
Oil, Butter, Salt etc.
Various types of soiling - sensitive to specific products
Rust, Chewing-gum, Mildew
Chemical soiling - sensitive to specific products
Ink, Mercury-Chrome, Deodorants, Paints
3.4 Mechanical action
The mechanical action of the appliance is produced by the combination of clockwise/anti-clockwise rotation
of the drum, which agitates the wash load in the washing solution. This action tends to transfer the dirt from
the fabrics to the washing solution (water + chemical products).
The mechanical action may be VIGOROUS or DELICATE:
Vigorous drum movement in alternating directions (clockwise and anti-clockwise) is suitable for cotton
and polyester fabrics.
Delicate drum movement in alternating directions (clockwise and anti-clockwise) is suitable for wool and
delicate fibres.
3.5 Duration of the washing cycle
Each washing cycle requires a minimum duration in order to guarantee satisfactory results. The duration of
the cycle depends on the type of fabric, the type of soiling and the quantity of washing in the drum.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 11 599 35 23-17

3.6 Water
Water is the most important element in the washing process, and is fundamental to the final result. Ideally,
the water used for the wash should have the following composition:
Clear and transparent, a low level of hardness, absence of manganese, low iron and mineral salt
content.
The water may contain various substances (mineral and others) in varying quantities:
Fe (iron), Mg (manganese), Si (silicon), Na (sodium), Ca (calcium), K (potassium).
Some of these substances, if they exceed a certain level or are present in combination, may lead to the
formation of ferrous oxide, which causes the well-known phenomenon of "rust spots".
In addition, if present in excessive quantities in the water, some substances may react with the chemicals
contained in the detergent, altering its characteristics and preventing it from performing with full efficiency.
During the heating phase, calcium and manganese - if present in excessive quantities - react at
temperatures in excess of 60°C, producing calcareous substances that, suspended in the washing solution,
may adhere to the fabrics.
These calcareous substances may precipitate, forming a scale build-up on the internal components of the
appliance (tub, heating element, filter body etc.).
3.6.1 Formation of lime scale and ferrous oxide

As rain falls through the atmosphere, it dissolves the gases that it contains: when it comes into contact with
carbon dioxide, the rain absorbs the gas and transforms it into droplets of dilute carbonic acid (H2O+CO2 =
H2CO3).
When the carbonic acid falls onto calcareous rocks, it reacts with the limestone to form a solution of Calcium
bicarbonate (Ca(HCO3)2.
The problems of rust spots deposited on the washing are due mainly to the presence of ferrous oxide in the
water. It is difficult to determine the quantity of ferrous oxide originally present in the water and the quantity
that forms by reaction. If a filter with a very fine mesh is installed on the tap supplying the appliance, ferrous
residue will be deposited after only a few days. This is one of the major obstacles to achieving a satisfactory
washing result.
3.6.2 Hardness of the water

According to current conventions, the hardness of the water refers to the concentration of calcium and
magnesium ions. In general, a distinction is made between total hardness, permanent hardness, temporary
hardness, alkaline (carbonate) and non-alkaline hardness.
The total hardness indicates the concentration of calcium and magnesium, while the temporary hardness
refers only to magnesium and calcium bicarbonate, which precipitate when the water boils.
Permanent hardness is caused by all the salts which, after boiling, do not precipitate in the same way as
carbonates, but instead remain suspended in the solution (thus including sulphates, chlorides and calcium
and magnesium nitrates).
The alkaline (or carbonate) hardness refers to soluble bicarbonates, hydroxides and carbonates. The excess
hardness with respect to the alkaline hardness is referred to as the non-alkaline (non-carbonate) hardness.
The hardness of the water is caused by soluble calcium (Ca) and magnesium (Mg) salts, expressed as
calcium carbonate, measured in "°F", and calcium oxide, which is measured in "°D".
From a toxicological viewpoint, hard water does not appear to be harmful to human beings. On the contrary,
it has been observed that the presence of calcium and magnesium helps to prevent certain illnesses such as
hypertension and cardiac arrest.
However, at an industrial level, hard water may cause scale to form on mechanical parts due to the
presence of carbonates, sulphates and alkaline-terrous metal silicates. This scale build-up can significantly
reduce the efficiency of a machine. Especially at risk are components such as heat exchangers, boilers,
domestic appliances (washing machines, dishwashers etc.), because the reaction is endothermic. In other
words, the formation of carbonates is facilitated by an increase in temperature. In the dyeing industry,
calcium and magnesium may cause certain colouring agents to precipitate, thus causing uneven distribution
of the colour on the fabrics.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 12 599 35 23-17

3.6.3 Total water hardness
Total hardness is the sum of the temporary hardness (caused by calcium and magnesium bicarbonates) and
the permanent hardness (caused by sulphates, chlorides and calcium/magnesium nitrates).
Hardness expressed in French degrees (°F) represents the quantity of calcium carbonate, in grammes,
contained in 100 litres of water.
Hardness expressed in German degrees (°D) represents the quantity of calcium oxide, again in
grammes per 100 litres of water.
Conversion of °F - °D:
1 °D = 1,79 °F
1 °F = 0,56 °D
Classification of total water hardness expressed in °F and °D
°F °D
SOFT 0 – 14 0-7
AVERAGE HARDNESS 15 – 26 7 - 14
HARD 27 – 39 14 - 21
VERY HARD > 40 > 21
Negative effects of hard water:
Reduction in the effectiveness of anionic surface-active agents.
Increase in the quantity of dirt re-deposited.
Increase of residue deposited on the fabrics.
Increase of scale formation on the heating elements.
Hard water may cause the formation of incrustation on mechanical parts, due to the presence of carbonates,
sulphates and alkaline-terrous metal silicates. This may also lead to a considerable reduction in the
efficiency of the appliance, since the reaction is endothermic; in other words, the increase in temperature
favours the formation of carbonates.
The most important of the soluble salts present in water are calcium bicarbonate and magnesium
bicarbonate. When the water is heated to over 60°C, these react and precipitate to form limescale (which
deposits on the fabrics and causes stiffness).
Water softening mechanisms
Hard water can be softened in three ways:
SEQUESTRATION: soluble compounds such as TPF, polycarboxylics, citrates
PRECIPITATION: insoluble compounds such as soaps, sodium carbonate
ION EXCHANGE: insoluble compounds such as zeolites, lamellar silicates.
Water softeners are used only for washing temperatures in excess of 60°C, i.e. when the high temperature
causes the calcium to precipitate.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 13 599 35 23-17

3.7 Detergents
Modern detergents are less aggressive than those used in the past, partly for reasons of environmental
protection and partly to prevent damaging the fibres. If used correctly, these offer an excellent protective
treatment and a high level of washing power.
Detergents that contain no phosphates are far more sensitive to the reaction with calcium. When the door of
a washing machine is opened, the user will immediately observe that the interior is clean and shiny if high-
quality detergents have been used.
3.7.1 Composition of a detergent
SURFACE-ACTIVE AGENTS (soap and active washing substances)
ZEOLITES (water softeners)
ALKALIS
BLEACHING AGENTS
OPTICAL WHITENERS
OTHERS: Enzymes, stabilizing agents, CMC, colouring agents, perfumed essences, TAED, PVP,
lipase, protease.
3.7.2 Functions of the principal components of a detergent
1. SOAP: A detergent that is soluble in water, composed of sodium or potassium salts, fatty acids (such as
oleic or stearic). The main function of soap is to dissolve grease. During the washing cycle, the grease
precipitates, creating insoluble calcium (Ca) and magnesium (Mg) salts which, if present in excessive
quantities, tend to become attached to the fabrics (black balls).
2. SURFACE-ACTIVE AGENTS: synthetic substances with wetting and detergent properties, and able to
reduce the surface tension thus facilitating the penetration of the washing solution into the fabrics to
dissolve the dirt. These agents disperse and emulsify the dirt and grease, which are then held in
suspension in the washing solution.
3. SILICATES: alkaline substances that improve the washing result, protecting the fabrics or dishes and
the appliance itself from corrosion. Not aggressive to the skin.
4. ANTI-FOAM (regulator): the correct quantity of foam is necessary for the effectiveness of the
mechanical action, and therefore influences the intensity of the wash (large quantities of foam reduce
the mechanical action and vice versa). Anionic surface-active agents generally increase the quantity of
foam.
5. ZEOLITES: Zeolite is an insoluble solid that absorbs or fixes calcium ions, replacing them with sodium
ions (to reduce hardness), thus increasing the effectiveness of the detergent.
6. ALKALIS: alkalis make the washing solution alkaline, increasing the washing power and swelling the
fibres so that the dirt is dissolved more easily. In addition, alkalis help to remove scale build-up from the
appliance.
7. BLEACHES: bleaches are generally perborates (substances that generate active oxygen). Active
oxygen is released during the washing phase between 60°C and 90°C, and requires the presence of
stabilizers to ensure uniform action. The oxidizing power of the active oxygen released eliminates
substances that stain the fibres.
8. OPTIC WHITENERS (also known as blueing agents): optic whiteners are organic chemical substances
that can transform ultraviolet light into visible "BLUE" light (yellow + blue = white).
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 14 599 35 23-17

3.7.3 Functions of other components of a detergent
1. ENZYMES: Enzymes are proteins produced by living cells (animal and vegetable) and are able to
transform organic materials with a high molecular weight, such as starches, proteins and fats, into more
easily soluble products. These integrate with and facilitate the action of the detergent, eliminating
protein-based dirt. Their direct action also facilitates the removal of other types of dirt. In order to give
positive results, enzymatic products must be used at temperatures between 40°C and 60°C (maximum).
At higher temperatures, the proteins contained in the enzymes (which are temperature-labile) are
vulnerable to denaturing. Denaturation causes irreversible alterations in the structure, leading to the
loss of the enzymatic action.
Protease - which is present in enzymatic detergents - is equally active in the presence of fresh and old
proteins alike.
Enzymatic detergents are especially active in both the pre-wash phase and in separate soak cycles.
In all soak processes, products containing enzymes able to dissociate the proteins improve the results
of the wash considerably. In addition, enzymes vertically break down scale incrustations deposited on
the appliance, thus helping to detach the alkalis present in the detergent.
2. STABILIZING AGENTS: These are chemical products designed to control the uniformity of the bleach
by stabilizing the washing solution.
3. CMC: CMC is used to hold the dirt in suspension so that dirt particles are not re-deposited on the
fabrics.
4. COLOURING AGENTS: These serve exclusively to make the product more attractive to the eye.
5. PERFUMED ESSENCES: Give the washing a pleasant fragrance.
6. TAED: TAED reacts with the perborate to form peracetic acid, which has strong bleaching and
disinfectant properties even at low temperatures (reacting from a temperature of just 30°C). However, if
the TAED content is excessive, coloured fabrics may fade. By itself, perborate reacts at temperatures in
excess of 60°C, while perborate with TAED begins to react at 30°C.
7. PVP: An ingredient that prevents colour transfer.
8. LIPASE: Chemical substances (enzymes) that dissolve fats by hydrolization.
9. PROTEASE: Chemical substances that destroy proteins (casein, albumin, gelatin, blood protein,
perspiration, food residue, fruit juice). These release albumin molecules, which become soluble in water.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 15 599 35 23-17

3.7.4 Detergent quantities
- efficiency of the washing programme according to the load and the water hardness.
In order to perform its function completely and correctly, the appropriate quantity of detergent must be used,
which depends on the quantity of water that is contained in the tub of the washing machine, the type of
washing cycle, the type of fabrics, the type of soiling and the quantity of washing in the drum.
Small quantities of detergent will be insufficient for efficient washing. But excessive quantities of detergent
will cause yellowing of the fabrics, since the final rinse will not be sufficient to remove all the excess
detergent, traces of which will remain on the fabrics.
The detergent properties of the soap are considerably reduced when the water is hard. The harder the
water, the greater is the possibility that calcareous soap will precipitate: 1 gramme of calcium bonds to 16
grammes of soap, thus making the soap ineffective and reducing the washing power significantly.
The combination of calcareous soap forms lumps of fat which remain attached to the dirt. This fatty
substance tends to deposit on the edges of the sink, on the bathtub and on the seals of the washing
machine. It also deposits easily on the fabrics, turning them a greyish colour (stains); in addition, it
considerably reduces the capacity of the fabrics for absorption.
The hardness of the water not only reduces the washing power of the detergent, but also reduces the
softness, resistance and whiteness of the fabrics washed.
When hardening agents such as Ca (calcium) and Mg (magnesium) react with certain components of the
detergent, the fabrics may become encrusted (calcium and detergent deposits) after a number of washes.
These give the fabrics a greyish colour and make them rough to the touch, as well as reducing their capacity
for absorption significantly. This phenomenon is especially noticeable in the case of terrycloth garments
(shower robes, towels etc.), causing them to lose their particular properties and to wear out faster.
Quantities recommended by the producers
Normal/concentrated detergent: 150 - 300 g. / 15 g. per 15l. H2O
Obviously, appliances designed with reduced consumption in mind (energy label) and belonging to
energy classes A, B, C and D are designed to wash using up to 50% less detergent than other
appliances.
Powder detergents
PRE-WASH DETERGENTS: → WITH ENZYMES
COMPLETE DETERGENTS: → REDUCED-FOAM
→ EXTRA-FOAM (for hand washing)
SPECIAL DETERGENTS: → FOR DELICATE FABRICS AND WOOL
→ FOR COLOURED FABRICS
Liquid detergents
→ FOR HDLD COLOUR-FAST COLOUREDS
→ FOR SYNTHETIC FIBRES
→ LDLD FOR LOW-TEMPERATURE WASHING (DELICATES)
→ FOR WOOL AND DELICATE SYNTHETIC FIBRES
→ FOR HEAVY-DUTY HAND- OR MACHINE WASHING
→ FOR PRE-TREATMENT OF PERSISTENT STAINS
Compact detergents
→ EXCELLENT FOR ALL WASHES - THE QUANTITY DEPENDS ON THE BRAND
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 16 599 35 23-17

3.7.5 Washing additives
1. SOFTENER: (Cationic surface-active agent + fragrance): This additive is introduced automatically by the
appliance during the final rinse. It softens the surface of the fabric, which thus remains soft to the touch
and easier to iron. If used incorrectly before or during the wash, or if introduced too early into the tub by
the water fill system, its action is rendered ineffective by the surface-active agents contained in the
detergent.
2. BLEACH: (sodium hypochlorite) - Used for white fabrics, before the main wash cycle. 150 ml of bleach
will be sufficient for a short, low-temperature wash. Care should be taken when bleaching: certain stains
(blood, perspiration), if bleached before the enzyme-based function, may become permanently fixed to
the fabric, giving an unsatisfactory washing result. In normal washes, the bleach must be introduced
automatically by the washing machine during the first rinse, at the end of the washing phase and after
the detergent has performed its functions, since it destroys the enzymes contained in the detergent. If
the stains have already become permanent after a previous wash, they will be impossible to remove.
3. DELICATE BLEACH (hydrogen peroxide) - Oxygen is not as strong as chloride, especially if the water is
very hard. It must always be used together with the detergent, both for hand washing and when using a
washing machine. It may be used for pre-treatment, but always followed by a wash using detergent. It
may be used at all temperatures and during the wash (together with detergent), or poured directly onto
the fabrics.
3.7.6 Bleaching
Bleaching is generally performed after the wash (by hand or in a machine), except in the case of wine, tea or
coffee stains etc.
Light-sensitive stains (tomato etc.), if appearing on the fabrics after the wash, may disappear when the fabric
is exposed to sunlight for a time (action of the sun's rays).
If a white fabric is treated with a bleach and then exposed to sunlight, the optical effect may be cancelled,
and yellowish stains may become noticeable. However, these will tend to disappear when the garment is no
longer exposed to the sun.
Using bleaches
Various types of bleach exist to suit different conditions of use, since they remain active either within or in
excess of certain temperatures.
Hypochlorite: must always be used cold (during the 1st rinse)
Peroxide: may be used above 60° during the washing phase
Delicate bleach (solid): a teaspoonful should be added to the detergent. Suitable for all types of fabrics,
including coloureds. Active at medium and high temperatures.
Delicate bleach (liquid, i.e. hydrogen peroxide) should be introduced into the appropriate compartment.
Active perborate: active at temperatures in excess of 60°C.
N.B. If hydrogen peroxide or sodium hypochlorite are used for bleaching, or in the presence of "activators"
attached to the garments (ferrous accessories such as buttons, buckles, zips, hooks etc.), these may
cause holes in the fabric or stiffness of the fibres due to re-deposited oxides which form the well-
known "rust spots".
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 17 599 35 23-17

3.8 The function of the water temperature
The variety and quality of natural and synthetic fibres which comprise the fabrics, which are sometimes
present in percentages that are not declared correctly on the labels, make it necessary in many cases to use
a detergent whose washing action is effective at low temperatures. As a result, the consumer today tends to
use washing programmes with a maximum temperature of about 60°C, partly due to increasing sensitivity to
energy savings.
Manufacturers of detergents, in line with this trend, have modified the quality of their products to meet this
need, and frequently emphasize these characteristics in their promotional activities.
Temperature helps to dissolve the dirt (solvent effect)
Temperature facilitates and accelerates the chemical reactions, especially when bleaching.
The "CORRECT" temperature in the various phases of the washing cycle:
reduces the cohesion of the dirt

facilitates the suspension of the dirt in the water
facilitates the reaction of the alkalis (swelling the fabrics so that the dirt is dissolved more easily)
High temperatures do not facilitate the removal of all types of dirt; in fact, blood, egg-yolk, milk etc. are more
easily removed if washed in cold water; if hot water is used, these stains adhere more strongly to the fibres
and become more difficult to remove.
3.8.1 Using the correct temperature
The temperature of the washing solution is used to remove the dirt and to ensure hygiene.
HIGH TEMPERATURE = 80 - 90°C
Suitable for difficult soiling: cotton and linen (whites) with bleach, perborate and hydrogen peroxide.
AVERAGE TEMPERATURE = 50 - 60°C (most washing cycles)
Suitable for washing colour-fast fabrics: cotton and linen (coloured) with hypochlorite-Based bleaches.
LOW TEMPERATURE = 30 - 40°C
Suitable for washing wool, synthetic fabrics, other delicate fibres, and for soaking of fabrics soiled with blood
or protein-based substances.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 18 599 35 23-17

3.9 Washing machine programmes
1. Water fill with detergent introduced from the pre-wash compartment

Pre-wash 2. Brief heating phase and hot wash (30 - 40°C)
(not for wool and, in some
3. Drain
cases, delicate fabrics)
4. (Brief spin)
1. Water fill with detergent introduced from the wash compartment
2. Heating and hot wash
- 30÷90°C for cotton and linen
- 30÷60°C for synthetic fibres
Wash - 30÷40°C for wool, silk and delicate fabrics
3. Maintenance phase (mechanical action after the heating phase)
4. Cooling water fill (in cotton cycles, reduces the temperature of the drain
water, in synthetic cycles as an anti-crease cycle)
5. Drain
6. Brief spin (cotton/linen only)
1. Water fill (and, if selected, introduction of bleach for cotton/linen only)
2. Cold wash
1st rinse 3. Drain
4. Brief intermediate spin (if selected - cotton/linen only)
1. Water fill
2. Cold wash
2nd (3rd) rinse 3. Drain
4. Brief intermediate spin (if selected - cotton/linen only)
1. Water fill to softener compartment
Final rinse (softener) 2. Cold wash
1. In cotton/linen cycles, the programme generally passes to the subsequent
phase; it stops with water in the tub (rinse-hold) only if this function has
been selected (certain models only)
(Rinse-hold) 2. The cycle generally stops with water in the tub (rinse-hold) for synthetic,
delicates and wool cycles if there is no rinse-hold button or selector. If these
are featured (rinse-hold, delicate spin, anti-crease etc.), the cycle may stop
or pass to the subsequent phase according to the option selected.
1. Drain
2. Final spin
Final spin - at maximum speed for cotton/linen
- brief and at reduced speed for synthetics, delicates and wool (certain
models only)
STOP
Washer-dryers only:
1. Drying with heating at reduced power for cotton/linen; half-power for
Drying synthetic fabrics
2. Cooling phase
STOP
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 19 599 35 23-17

4 FRONT-LOADING WASHING MACHINE
1. Timer
2. Detergent dispenser
3. Steam venting hose
4. Pressure switch
5. Tub suspension spring
6. Tub
7. Detergent entry tube
8. Tube between solenoid and
detergent dispenser
9. Water fill solenoid
10. Water fill hose
11. Rear counterweight
12. Drum pulley
13. Bearings
14. Thermostat
15. Heating element
16. Drain hose
17. Motor pulley
18. Motor
19. Damper
20. Drain pump
21. Pressure chamber
22. Drain filter
23. Tube between tub and filter body
24. Door safety interlock
25. Porthole door
26. Bellows seal
27. Front counterweight
28. Drum
4.1 Traditional washing system
In a washing machine, the dirt in the fibres is removed by a combination of mechanical and chemical
actions.
The solenoid valve ducts water through the detergent dispenser, where it collects the detergent and passes
into the tub. The correct water level is controlled by one or more pressure switches.
The fabrics loaded into the drum are maintained in constant movement by the rotation of the drum.
The particles of dirt, after being separated from the fibres of the fabric by the chemical action of the
detergent and the temperature of the water, are removed by the passage of the water through the fibres.
This action is obtained by a continuous series of immersions and agitations of the fabrics in the washing
solution.
The heating element is switched on until the selected temperature is reached; the temperature of the water
is controlled by thermostats or sensors.
At the end of the washing cycle, the dirty water is drained by the drain pump.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 20 599 35 23-17

4.1.1 Recovery of detergent loss from the circulation hose
2. Drum
3. Tube between the tub and the filter body
4. Drain filter
5. Circulation hose
The water that passes through the re-circulation circuit during the movement of the drum - which acts as the
impeller of a pump - prevents detergent residue from depositing in the lower section of the hydraulic circuit
(filter body).
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 21 599 35 23-17

4.2 Drain circuit with "ECO-BALL" ball valve
1. Timer
3. Steam venting tube
4. Pressure switch
5. Tub suspension spring
6. Tub
8. Tube between solenoid and detergent
dispenser
9. Solenoid valve
10. Water fill hose
12. Drum pulley
13. Bearings
14. Thermostat / temperature sensor
15. Heating element
16. Drain hose
17. Motor pulley
18. Motor
19. Damper
20. Drain pump
22. Drain filter
23. Tub drain hose
24. Sphere (eco-ball)
25. Door interlock
26. Porthole door
27. Door seal
29. Drum
4.2.1 “ECO-BALL” ball valve
The "Eco-ball" valve consists of a sphere

contained inside the tube that connects the tub to
the filter body. Its purpose is to keep the washing
water (contained in the tub) separate from the
water in the drain circuit.
Advantages with respect to a conventional circuit:
Energy savings: the water inside the drain circuit is not heated.
The detergent does not deposit on the filter body, thus improving the quality of the wash (reduction in
mechanical detergent losses).
Better rinsing efficiency.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 22 599 35 23-17

4.2.2 Ball valve: operating principle
During the water fill and washing phases, the sphere is raised by the water contained in the drain circuit
to the uppermost position, thus preventing water from passing between the tub and the filter body. To
ensure correct operation of the system, it is important to ensure that the drain hose is always correctly
connected to the corresponding support on the rear panel (at a height of at least 60 cm.).
During the drain phases, the suction effect

created by the operation of the pump causes the
sphere to move downwards, thus allowing the
water to flow through the drain circuit.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 23 599 35 23-17

4.3 “JETSYSTEM” washing system
In the "Jetsystem" washing system, considering that the removal of the dirt is performed solely by the
water that passes through the fibres, the remaining part of the washing solution has been eliminated.
In other words, this system is based on the possibility of washing the fabrics using only the water used
to wet them; the quantity of water introduced into the appliance is therefore proportional to the type and
quantity of the fabrics in the drum.
The water is introduced by the solenoid valve; its level is controlled by a pressure switch.
The water present in the bottom of the tub is circulated by a pump, which ducts it to the fabrics through
an aperture in the bellows seal (or through an aperture in the upper section of the tub).
The mechanical action is provided by the bi-directional rotation of the drum at low speed; the wash load
is continuously rotated inside the drum by three drum lifters.
4.3.1 JETSYSTEM hydraulic circuit (first version)
1. Water fill solenoid valve

3. Tube from detergent dispenser to tub
4. Tub
5. Drum
6. Drum lifter
8. Filter body
9. Tube between filter body and
circulation pump
10. Circulation pump
11. Circulation tube
12. Thermostat
13. Heating element
15. Drain pump
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 24 599 35 23-17

4.3.2 Jetsystem “DIRECT SPRAY” washing system
(current production)

4. Tub
5. Drum
6. Drum lifter
8. Filter body
9. Tube between filter body/circulation pump
12. Door seal
13. Heating element
14. Thermostat
15. Drain pump
4.3.3 Circuit with heat exchanger

(certain older models only)

4. Tub
5. Drum
6. Drum lifter
8. Filter body
9. Motor
12. Door seal
13. Heat exchanger
14. Thermostat
15. Drain pump
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 25 599 35 23-17

4.3.4 “NEW JET” recirculation circuit–P63BD version (large door)

3. Tube from detergent
dispenser to tub
4. Tub
5. Drum
6. Drain hose
7. Drain filter
8. Drain pump
9. Tube between tub and filter
body
10. Circulation pump intake tube
13. Heating element
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 26 599 35 23-17

5 WASHER-DRYERS
5.1 Drying system
♦ The drying system is based on forced-air circulation with water-jet condensation. The maximum drying
capacity is equivalent to half the maximum load of dry washing. If a full load is washed, two drying
cycles are necessary. If a half-load is washed, the drying cycle can be programmed for automatic
execution at the end of the washing cycle.
♦ During the drying phases, the drum rotates in alternate directions at low speed. The fan ducts the
heated air from the heating elements to the inside of the tub, where it removes the humidity from the
washing. The cold-water jet, coming into contact with the hot and humid air, generates a heat exchange
and thus condenses the humidity. The cooled, dry air is ducted back to the fan, again heated by the
heating element, and is then circulated back into the drum.
♦ In cycles for SYNTHETIC fibres, only one branch of the heating element is switched on (half power). In
COTTON cycles, both branches are powered (full power).
♦ The cooling water and condensation are drained off by the drain pump.
♦ During the last few minutes of the drying cycle, the heating elements are switched off, while the fan
continues to operate in order to complete the cooling phase.
5.2 Drying circuit (type "A" condenser)
1. Fan
2. Fan motor
3. Heating element casing
4. Drying heaters
5. Duct
6. Door seal
7. Tub
8. Tube between tub and condenser
9. Drying condenser
10. Coupling
12. Water fill hose to condenser
14. Air-break
15. Drain filter
16. Drain pump
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 27 599 35 23-17

5.3 Drying circuit (type "B" condenser)
1. Fan
2. Fan motor
3. Drying heaters
4. Heating element casing
5. Duct
6. Door seal
7. Tub
8. Tube between tub and condenser
9. Drying condenser
10. Coupling
12. Condenser fill hose and steam vent
13. Drain filter
14. Drain pump
5.3.1 “HP” version
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 28 599 35 23-17

6 STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICS
6.1 “NEXUS” technology
These appliances are produced using the NEXUS technology, a patented system consisting of five sub-
assemblies:
Base
Cabinet
Control panel support
Washing group
Work-top
1. Base
2. Front cabinet shell
3. Rear cabinet shell
4. Control panel support
5. Work-top
6. Washing group
7. Suspension spring
8. Damper
10. Drain filter body
1. Control panel
3. Base
4. Main PCB
5. Tub
6. Pressure switch tubes
7. Pressure chamber
9. Temperature sensor
10. Motor
11. Drive belt
12. Drum pulley
14. Cable clamp
15. Solenoid valve
18. Main terminal block
19. Pressure switch
20. Drain hose
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 29 599 35 23-17

6.1.1 Washing machine with 32 cm-depth cabinet

2. Tub
3. Drum rotation motor
4. Drain pump
5. Damper
6. Heating element
7. Thermostat
8. Pressure switch
9. Capacitor/suppressor
10. Base
6.2 Base
1. Base
2. Filter body
3. Drain pump
4. Dampers
The base is built in "CARBORAN", a specially-

developed plastic.
As well as the two cabinet shells, the filter body, drain
pump, dampers and (if featured) the circulation pump
and motor control system are all housed in the base.
6.3 Control panel support
1. Timer
2. Adjustable thermostat
3. Push-button
The control panel support (in galvanized sheet metal) is secured by a series of screws to the two cabinet
shells.
Several components are fitted to the support: timer, adjustable thermostat, pushbuttons, capacitor, pressure
switches, detergent dispenser and control panel.
Also secured to the support are the two suspension springs for the washing group.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 30 599 35 23-17

6.4 Cabinet
The cabinet consists of two half-shells in enamelled sheet metal, which are
secured to a Carboran base. The support cross-member (in galvanized sheet
metal) is screwed to the upper section of the cabinet. The work-top is screwed to
the rear section of the cabinet shell.
Under-counter versions are fitted with tops in galvanized sheet metal.
The cabinets are available in a range of different versions that can be installed in
any part of the home (bathroom, kitchen, etc.):
32cm (P66)
42/45cm (P61)
52/54cm (P65)
57/60cm (P62, without plinth)
57/60cm (RIM)
57/60cm (P63, with plinth)
62 cm (NEAT)
6.4.1 Types of cabinet

Types of cabinet and dimensions in cm (HxWxD)
(the height includes the 3cm top, if featured))
P61soft P63soft P65soft NEAT
(85x60x45) (85x60x57) (85x60x54) (85x60x62)
P61 square P63soft (large door) P65 square P63 double door
(85x60x42) (85x60x57) (85x60x52) (85x60x57)
P62 soft P63 soft P66 RIM

(85x60x57) (85x60x57) (85x60x32) (85x60x57)
P62 square P63 soft (large door) P66 built-in P64 built-in
(85x60x57) (85x60x57) (78x60x32) (82x60x54)
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 31 599 35 23-17

P63 square P62 (P65) soft
P62 INPUT NEAT(JETSY- IZ)
RIM P63 soft - large door
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 32 599 35 23-17

6.5 Porthole door
Several types of porthole door may be fitted:

• standard (26 cm) or large (30 cm)
• angle of aperture (130° or 180°)
• alignment with front panel (flush or protruding)
• differently-styled surrounds
• type of aperture (various handles, or button on control panel)
6.5.1 Examples of porthole doors
1. Front surround
2. Door glass
3. Rear surround
4. Hinge
5. Masking plate
6. Handle
7. Hinge pin
8. Latch
9. Spring
10. Flange
6.5.1.1 Handle assembly
1. Front surround
2. Rear surround
3. Latch
4. Hinge pin
5. Latch spring
1. Handle
2. Hinge pin
3. Latch
4. Latch spring
5. Handle spring (certain models only)
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 33 599 35 23-17

6.5.2 Porthole door with button-actioned aperture
On certain models, the door can be opened by pressing

a button on the control panel.
All models with the P66 (32 cm) cabinet are fitted with
this feature.
1. Door aperture button

2. Spring
3. Support
4. Wire
5. Lever
6. Door safety interlock
7. Latch aperture lever
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 34 599 35 23-17

6.6 Control panel
The plastic control panel is secured to the control panel

support by anchor tabs and one or more screws.
The shape of the control panel depends on the styling
and therefore the brand of the appliance.
Various types of control panels are available for each
styling, each fitted with a different number of buttons and
knobs.
6.6.1 Examples of control panels
ALFA
DELTA3
ELIPSE
GAMMA
MULTIPANEL
AEG SIGMA
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 35 599 35 23-17

6.7 Washing groups
The washing group is suspended from the support cross-member by two helical springs.
The oscillation of the washing group is absorbed by the two dampers attached to the base.
Balancing of the washing group is provided by a front counterweight in cement and by a rear counterweight.
Some models are not fitted with the rear counterweight.
6.7.1 Damper
1. Rubber vibration damper

2. Shaft
3. Shaft seals
4. Cylinder
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 36 599 35 23-17

6.7.2 Types of washing groups
Appliances in the NEXUS range may be fitted with washing groups of varying dimensions and spin speeds.
CARBORAN
Load capacity (cotton)
Type Drum volume
Rated Max.
G17 3 Kg 3,5 Kg 26 l
G18 4 Kg 4,5 Kg 38 l
G19 4,5 Kg 5 Kg 42 l
G20 5 Kg 5,5 Kg 46 l
G21 5,5 Kg 6,5 Kg 54 l
STAINLESS STEEL (not used for new models)

Load capacity (cotton)
Type Drum volume
Rated Max.
G10 4 Kg 4,5 Kg 38 l
G11 4,5 Kg 5 Kg 42 l
G12 5 Kg 5,5 Kg 46 l
G13 5,5 Kg 6,5 Kg 54 l
Spin speed Residual humidity Efficiency of spin

400 85 % F
500 78 % E
800 66 % D
1000 60 % C
1200 53 % B
1400 52 % B
1600 44 % A
CARBORAN STAINLESS STEEL
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 37 599 35 23-17

6.7.3 Washing group in Carboran
The tub consists of two half-shells in Carboran, secured

together by a series of self-tapping screws.
The two counterweights are screwed to the half-shells.
The bellows seal is secured to the front half-shell by a metal
elastic ring.
1. Front half-shell
2. O-ring
3. Rear half-shell
4. Drum
6. Counterweight anchor
screw
7. Bellows seal
8. Ring securing the seal to
the tub
9. Ring securing the seal to
the cabinet
11. Washing group
suspension springs
12. Damper
13. Damper hinge pin
14. Half-shell anchor screws
6.7.3.1 Sup
por
t Single-bearing version
for
bea
ring
s
1. Rear tub shell

2. Bearing support
3. Drum shaft
4. External bearing
5. Internal bearing
6. Drum shaft bushing
7. Drum shaft seal
8. Drum
9. Ring
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 38 599 35 23-17

6.7.4 Stainless steel washing group
1. Tub casing 9. Ring securing the seal to the tub

2. Band spring 10. Bellows seal
3. Tub support band 11. Ring securing the seal to the cabinet
4. Drum 12. Rear counterweight
5. Flange seal 13. Tub spider
6. Front flange 14. Idle pulley
7. Front counterweight 15. Motor
8. Retaining ring
Spider with two bearings Single-bearing spider
1. Tub spider 1. Tub spider

2. Internal bearing 2. Bearing
3. External bearing 3. Seal
4. Seal 4. Ring
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 39 599 35 23-17

6.7.5 Drum
The drum consists of a stainless steel casing to which the two

flanges are crimped.
Three Carboran lifters are pressure-fitted to the internal face of
the drum.
The drum spider, in aluminium alloy, is secured to the edge of
the drum by screws.
A brass bushing is pressure-fitted to the drum shaft.
1. Drum casing
2. Flange
3. Drum lifter
4. Drum spider
5. Screws
6. Drum shaft
7. Drum shaft bushing
Drum spider
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 40 599 35 23-17

6.7.6 Drum rotation drive belt
These appliances are fitted with elastic drive belts. The motor is
mounted in a fixed position, and no regulation is possible.
1. Motor pulley
2. Elastic drive belt
3. Drum pulley
Different types of drive belts, produced by various manufacturers and with different characteristics, are used
in production:
• rubber belts (black)

• plastic belts (yellow)
The length marked on the drive belt (1217, 1280 etc.) is the working length based on the belt mounted on
the pulleys, which is calculated according to the following parameters:
∅ D = diameter of drum pulley

∅ de = diameter of motor pulley
I = centre-line distance between the pulleys
For a given working length, the belts - which consist of different materials - have a different degree of
elasticity. This means that, when not fitted to the appliance, their lengths may be different. It is normal that
the length of a plastic belt not fitted to the pulleys is three or four centimetres greater than that of a rubber
belt.
The belts are of the poly-V type, and are marked with two further parameters:
• shape of the drive belt (J / H)

• number of teeth (4, 5, 6, 8)
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 41 599 35 23-17

6.8 Detergent dispenser
6.8.1 Detergent dispenser with distribution levers

This type of detergent dispenser is used in models featuring:
• electromechanical timers
• hybrid timers
• MWM electronic control systems, which feature an electromechanical distributor for movement of the
levers
Two versions of this dispenser exist: one is larger, the other is of reduced size (ecological).
6.8.1.1 Operating principle
Irrespective of the shape of the detergent dispenser, the operating principle remains the same:
The water is ducted through the intake nozzle to the distributor. According to the position of the timer camme
during the washing cycle, the distributor ensures that the water is ducted through only one channel of the
feed duct, so that the detergent is removed from the appropriate compartment only.
1. Duct
2. Water intake
3. Distributor
4. Eccentric camme
5. Timer
6. Camme
7. Lever mechanism
8. Detergent drawer
1. Cold water solenoid valve

2. Hot water solenoid valve (not all models)
3. Water distributor
4. Water distribution ducts
5. Detergent drawer
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 42 599 35 23-17

"LONG" DISPENSER "SHORT" DISPENSER (ecological)
1. Fill hose 11. Detergent drawer 1. Fill hose 11. Detergent drawer
2. Washer 12. Siphon for additives 2. Washer 12. Siphon for additives
3. Cable clamp 13. Spring 3. Cable clamp 13. Spring
4. Extension hose 14. Distributor pin 4. Extension hose 14. Distributor pin
5. Water fill solenoid 15. Eccentric lever 5. Water fill solenoid 15. Eccentric lever
(cold) regulation camme (cold) regulation camme
6. Water fill solenoid 16. Lever arm 6. Water fill solenoid 16. Lever arm
(hot) (certain models 17. Camme (hot) (certain models 17. Camme
only) 18. Timer only) 18. Timer
7. Dispenser nozzle 19. Detergent entry tube 7. Dispenser nozzle 19. Detergent entry tube
8. Water distributor 20. Clip 8. Water distributor 20. Clip
9. Dispenser duct 21. Steam venting tube 9. Dispenser duct 21. Steam venting tube
10. Detergent dispenser 10. Detergent dispenser 22. Solenoid valve support
Detergent dispenser Detergent dispenser
3 compartments 4 compartments 3 compartments 4 compartments
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 43 599 35 23-17

6.8.2 Detergent dispenser with multiple-outlet solenoid valve ("long" version)
Various versions of this type of detergent dispenser are used in washers and washer-dryers featuring:
• EWM2000 control system
The water is ducted into the detergent compartment by a solenoid valve with one inlet and 2 or 3 outlets.
Some models are fitted with a second solenoid valve for the introduction of hot water. The detergent drawer
may consist of 3 or 4 compartments.
1. Fill hose
2. Washer
3. Cable clamp
4. Solenoid valve support
5. Water fill solenoid (cold)
6. Water fill solenoid (hot) (certain
models only)
7. Tube
8. Dispenser nozzle
9. Dispenser duct
12. Detergent drawer
13. Siphon for additives
15. Clip
• Water duct with four compartments and flow

• Water duct with four compartments
deviator
• 2- or 3-way water inlet nozzle
• 2-way water inlet nozzle
• 3- or 4-compartment detergent drawer
• 4-compartment detergent drawer
Combinations of solenoid valves

2-way solenoid valve +
2-way solenoid valve
solenoid valve for introduction of hot 3-way solenoid valve
water
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 44 599 35 23-17

6.8.2.1 Principles of operation
Water fill to pre-wash compartment

(Pre-wash solenoid valve)
• This version is used in models with three compartments
(EWM1000) and 3 or 4 compartments (EWM2000). The detergent
contained in compartment "a" is introduced at the beginning of the
pre-wash phase.
• In certain models featuring the "stains" option, compartment "a" may
be used (as an alternative) to contain the stain-removal product,
which is introduced during the wash phase.
Water fill to wash compartment

(Washing solenoid valve)
• In all models, compartment "b" is used to contain the detergent,

which is introduced at the beginning of the wash phase.
Water fill to conditioner compartment

(pre-wash and wash solenoid valves)
• In all models, compartment "d" is used to contain the conditioner,

which is introduced at the beginning of the final rinse.
Water fill to pre-wash and bleach compartment

• In EWM1000 models with 4-compartment detergent dispensers,
water is ducted into compartments "a" and "c", though not at the
same time.
• If the user selects the pre-wash option, water is ducted through
compartments "a" and "c" at the beginning of the pre-wash phase.
If this option has not been selected, water is ducted through the
compartments at the beginning of the first rinse.
Water fill to bleach compartment

(Bleach solenoid valve)
• In EWM2000 models with 4 compartments, water is ducted through
compartment "c" at the beginning of the final rinse.
Hot water fill

(Wash + hot water solenoid valve)
• In models featuring the hot water solenoid valve (EWM2000 only),

the wash and hot water solenoid valves are actioned simultaneously
to duct mixed water (hot and cold) through the wash compartment.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 45 599 35 23-17

6.8.3 Detergent dispenser with multiple-outlet solenoid valve ("short" version)
Various versions of this type of detergent dispenser are used in washers featuring:
1. Fill hose
2. Washer
3. Cable clamp
5. Water fill solenoid (cold)
6. Water fill solenoid (hot) (some
EWM2000 models only)
7. Tube
8. Dispenser nozzle
9. Dispenser duct
12. Detergent drawer
13. Siphon for additives
15. Clip
Version: EM2000 drawer with 3-4 compartments

Version: EM1000 drawer with 4 compartments
EWM1000 drawer with 3 compartments
• Water duct with four compartments • Water duct with four compartments and "fork"
• 2- or 3-way water inlet nozzle • 2-way water inlet nozzle
• 3- or 4-compartment detergent drawer • 4-compartment detergent drawer
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 46 599 35 23-17

6.8.3.1 Operating principle

• This version is used in EWM2000/1000 models with 3-
compartment detergent dispensers. The detergent contained
in compartment "a" is introduced at the beginning of the pre-
wash phase.
• In certain models featuring the "stains" option, compartment
"a" may be used (as an alternative) to contain the stain-
removal product, which is introduced during the wash phase.

(Washing solenoid valve)
• In all models, compartment "b" is used to contain the

detergent, which is introduced at the beginning of the wash
phase.

(pre-wash and wash solenoid valves)
• In all models, compartment "d" is used to contain the

conditioner, which is introduced at the beginning of the final
rinse. The pre-wash and wash solenoid valves are actioned
simultaneously.

• In models (EWM2000) with 4-compartment detergent
dispensers, water is ducted into compartment "c" by a special
solenoid valve at the beginning of the first rinse.

• In models with 4 compartments (EWM1000), water is ducted
through compartments "a" and "c", though not simultaneously.
• If the user selects the pre-wash option, water is ducted
through compartments "a" and "c" at the beginning of the pre-
wash phase.
• If this option has not been selected, water is ducted through
the compartments at the beginning of the first rinse.
Hot water fill

(Wash + hot water solenoid valve)
• In models featuring the hot water solenoid valve (EWM2000

only), the wash and hot water solenoid valves are actioned
simultaneously to duct mixed water (hot and cold) through the
wash compartment.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 47 599 35 23-17

6.9 Drain/circulation circuits
The drain circuit differs according to the structure of the model and the washing system used.
6.9.1 Washers with traditional washing systems
1. Tub
3. Filter body
4. Drain pump
5. Drain hose
6. Circulation tube
1. Tube between tub and

filter body
2. Pressure chamber
3. Filter body
4. Washer
5. Cap
6. Drain filter
7. Washer (OR)
8. Drain pump
9. Pump cover
10. Drain hose
6.9.1.1 Drain filter

The drain filter features a fine mesh which traps all objects. The filter mesh must be cleaned frequently.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 48 599 35 23-17

6.9.2 Washers with traditional washing system and “ECO-BALL” ball valve
1. Drain pump
2. Pump cover
3. Filter body
4. Drain filter
5. Washer
6. Filter knob
8. Ball
9. Pressure chamber

This drain system is self-cleaning: the filter traps only objects of a certain size.
The drain tube is used to empty the drain circuit.
The pump impeller can be inspected after unscrewing the filter.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 49 599 35 23-17

6.9.3 Washers with traditional washing system and “P66" (32 cm) cabinet
1. Tub
2. Pressure chamber
3. Tube between tub and pump
4. Drain pump
5. Drain hose
In these appliances, the drain circuit is self-cleaning: the siphon on the tube between the tub and the pump
traps objects (coins, hair clips etc.) that might jam the pump.
1. Tube between tub and drain pump

2. Pressure chamber
3. Drain pump
4. Drain hose
5. Pump cover
6. Coupling
7. Circulation tube
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 50 599 35 23-17

6.9.4 Jetsystem washing machines (with circulation pump)
1. Filter body
2. Circulation pump
3. Circulation tube
4. Drain pump

body
2. Pressure chamber
3. Filter body
4. Washer
5. Cap
6. Drain filter
7. Washer (OR)
8. Drain pump
9. Pump cover
10. Drain hose
13. Pump cover

SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 51 599 35 23-17

6.9.5 “NEW JET” circulation circuit (Circulation pump) – version P63BD

body
2. Filter body
3. Drain filter
4. Washer
5. Filter knob
6. Drain pump
7. Pump cover
8. Circulation pump intake tube
9. Circulation pump
10. Pump cover

This drain system is self-cleaning: the filter traps only objects of a certain size.
The drain tube is used to empty the drain circuit.
The pump impeller can be inspected after unscrewing the filter.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 52 599 35 23-17

6.9.6 Jetsystem washing machines (Circulation pump) with Heat exchanger
(featured on a few older models only)
1. Filter body
2. Heat exchanger (Heating element)
3. Safety thermostat
4. Thermostats
5. Circulation pump
6. Circulation tube
7. Return tube
8. Drain pump
1. Tube between tub and

filter body
2. Pressure chamber
3. Filter body
4. Washer
5. Cap
6. Drain filter
7. Washer OR
8. Drain pump
9. Pump cover
10. Drain hose
13. Pump cover
14. Heat exchanger (Heating
element)
15. Cover

SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 53 599 35 23-17

6.9.7 Jetsystem washing machines with NEAT cabinet (JETSY- IZ)
1. Drain pump
2. Filter
3. Filter body
4. Circulation pump

2. Pressure chamber
3. Filter body
4. Washer
5. Cap
6. Drain filter
7. Washer (OR)
8. Drain pump
9. Pump cover
10. Drain hose
13. Pump cover
14. Drain tube

SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 54 599 35 23-17

7 WASHER-DRYER COMPONENTS
1. Tub
2. Drying condenser
3. Fan
4. Drying heater casing
5. Cold water fill solenoid
6. Drain pump
7.1 Fan assembly
The fan ducts the air from the condenser to the casing
containing the heating elements. The fan is actioned by a
drive belt attached to the fan motor.
1. Fan
2. Motor
3. Drive belt
1. Fan cover
2. Fan duct
3. Spacer
4. Bearings
5. "Seeger" rings
6. Spindle fastening
7. Pulley
8. Fan
9. Nut
7.1.1.1 Delivery of the fan
Ö standard version: 55 m3 of air/hr

Ö “High Performance” version: approximately 80m3 of air/hr
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 55 599 35 23-17

7.2 Heater element casing
The heating element casing consists of two half-

shells in aluminium alloy. The shells are joined
together by screws and sealed with silicone.
The casing is insulated by two half-shells in basalt
rock wool encased in a sheet of aluminium and
secured by two straps. The air is heated by two
heating elements.
During delicate drying, one of the heating elements
is switched off. The casing is fitted with
thermostats that control the temperature of the air.
"Standard" version "Standard" version "Mediterranean" “High Performance”

with electro- with electronic version version (electronic
mechanical timer control system (electromechanical" control system)
1 Heater element casing Heater element casing Heater element casing Heater element casing
Drying heaters Drying heaters Drying heaters Drying heaters
2 (700 + 700W) (700 + 700W) (700 + 400 W) (1000 + 1000W)
Manual-reset
NTC sensor for control thermostat (normally- NTC sensor for control
3 ------
of drying temperature closed, opens at of drying temperature
140°C)
Full-power thermostat Automatic-reset safety
Drying thermostat Drying thermostat
(only for appliances thermostat (normally-
(normally-closed, (normally-closed,
4 with MWM electronic closed, opens at
opens at 106°C, re- opens at 94°C, re-
control) (normally- 110°C, re-closes at
closes at 90°C) closes at 87°C)
open, closes at 85°C) 94°C)
Manual-reset Manual-reset Manual-reset
thermostat (normally- thermostat (normally- thermostat (normally-
5 closed, opens at closed, opens at
------
closed, opens at
150°C) 150°C) 150°C)
Automatic-reset safety Automatic-reset safety
thermostat (normally- thermostat (normally-
6 closed, opens at 98°C, closed, opens at 98°C,
------ ------
re-closes at 75°C) re-closes at 75°C)
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 56 599 35 23-17

7.3 Drying condenser
The drying condenser consists of a plastic structure which is connected to the lower section of the tub by a
rubber sleeve, and to the fan by a seal. The condenser is attached to the base of the appliance.
The humid air enters from the lower section of the condenser, while a jet of cold water is introduced from the
upper section. The shape of the condenser is such as to create a turbulence between the flow of humid air
and the jet of cold water. This condenses the humidity contained in the air. Therefore, the fan receives cold,
dry air, which is then re-circulated and again heated. The cooling water and the condensation run down to
the bottom of the tub, to be discharged by the drain pump.
Type “A” condenser Type “B” condenser
1. Solenoid valve 1. Solenoid valve

2. Tube from solenoid valve to 2. Tube from solenoid valve to
coupling coupling
3. Coupling 3. Coupling
4. Steam venting tube (washing) 4. Condensed water fill hose and
5. Tube from detergent dispenser steam vent (washing)
to tub 5. Tube from detergent dispenser
6. Condensed water fill hose to tub
7. Drying condenser 7. Drying condenser
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 57 599 35 23-17

7.3.1 Determining the drying time
(models with electronic control system only)
In certain models with electronic control (EWM2000/MWM), the user can select automatic drying cycles. In
this case, the drying time is determined according to the desired degree of humidity.
The electronic control system utilizes an NTC sensor, fitted to the drying condenser, to calculate the drying
time.
Type “A” condenser
1. Drying condenser
2. NTC temperature sensor
Type “B” condenser
1. Drying condenser
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 58 599 35 23-17

7.3.2 Condensation water fill
1. Solenoid valve
2. Tube from Solenoid valve to Coupling
3. Coupling
4. Tube from Coupling to condenser
5. Siphon on Tube from detergent dispenser to tub
The condensation water is delivered by a section of the cold water solenoid valve, whose delivery is 0.4
litres per minute.
The solenoid valve is connected by a hose to a coupling; the water is ducted from this coupling to the upper
section of the condenser. A small hole inside the coupling allows a tiny quantity of water to flow to the
bottom of the detergent dispenser. This ensures that there is always water inside the siphon on the hose
between the detergent dispenser and the tub, thus preventing steam from being expelled from the tub and
the detergent dispenser during drying.
7.4 Duct
1. Duct
2. Screw
3. Bellows seal
4. Wire clamp
The front duct directs the hot air coming from the heating elements directly to the interior of the drum,
passing through the bellows seal. The duct consists of two channels in aluminium alloy, joined together by
screws and sealed with silicone. The duct, too, is insulated by two basalt rock wool half-shells encased in a
sheet of aluminium and secured in position by two straps.
The duct is secured to the front cabinet shell by a screw; the seal between the duct and the bellows seal is
provided by a steel wire clamp.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 59 599 35 23-17

8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
8.1 Control systems
The operation of the appliance depends on the type of control system used, since the control system
governs the various operations comprising the washing cycle.
Types of control systems
• Electromechanical timers (F50-F51-F52-F53): the controls are

actuated by the commutator contacts, which are actioned by a
series of cammes. This movement is transmitted to the cammes
by a synchronous motor via a series of gears and levers.
• Integrated hybrid timers (VD54-VD55-VS60-VS71-VS81):

These consist of two components: an electromechanical timer
and a control PCB. The control board is soldered directly to the
connectors of the timer, and performs the following functions:
- controls the washing programmes and the various options
- powers the timer motor
- powers and controls the drum rotation motor
All the other components of the appliance are powered by the
timer contacts.
• Hybrid timers (VA20, VA30J): These consist of two

components: an electromechanical timer and a control PCB. The
control board is fitted to the base of the appliance, and performs
the following functions:
- controls the washing programmes and the various options
- powers the timer motor
- powers and controls the drum rotation motor
All the other components of the appliance are powered by the
electromechanical timer.
• Electronic control systems:

→ EWM2000: The main PCB (1), to which the microprocessor is
fitted, powers the components of the appliance via a triac and a
relay, and controls the various parameters for the functional
control of the washing programme. The control/display board (2)
acts as an interface between the user and the main PCB. This
board is fitted with the various buttons for selection of the
washing cycle options, and a series of LEDs. According to the
model, programmes may be selected using the buttons or a
programme selector knob.
→ EWM1000: The functions of the main PCB and the display board
are integrated in a single PCB (2).
For further details regarding the various functionalities, refer to the specific Service
Manuals issued for each type of timer/electronic control system.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 60 599 35 23-17

8.2 Suppressor
8.2.1 General characteristics

The suppressor is connected to the input of the appliances
power line, and prevents radiofrequency disturbance from
entering the power circuit.
8.2.2 Electrical symbols
8.2.3 Circuit diagrams
8.2.4 Checking for efficiency
THE APPLIANCE GENERATES RADIOFREQUENCY DISTURBANCE:

- check the efficiency of the earth circuit
THE APPLIANCE IS INOPERATIVE:

- Use an ohmmeter to check that the component is not faulty:
- across 1 - 3 about 0 Ω
- across 2 - 4 about 0 Ω
THE ELECTRICAL SAFETY CUT-OUTS INTERVENE:

- use an ohmmeter (capacitance meter) to check that the component is not short-circuited across 3 - 4
(>500KΩ)
- check that there are no leaks to earth
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 61 599 35 23-17

8.3 Push-button
Single-button versions are used.

These differ as regards the number and functionality of the contacts:
- switch
- deviator (single- or two-pole)
8.3.2 Electrical symbol
Normally-closed switch
Normally-open switch
Deviator
DOES NOT POWER THE APPLIANCE OR DOES NOT PERFORM THE SPECIFIC FUNCTION:
- Use a tester to check for correct closure (or aperture) of the various contacts.
- Press the button and check for switching of the contacts.
IMPOSSIBLE TO ACTION THE BUTTON

- Check that the spindle is not broken and that there are no other mechanical problems
(friction/breakage of couplings to cross-member).
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 62 599 35 23-17

8.4 Door safety interlock (traditional version)

The electromechanical door safety device performs the following functions:
• When powered, the voltmetric safety interlock closes the contacts of the
main switch that powers the electrical components of the appliance (only
if the door is closed).
• During operation, the lever is blocked mechanically, preventing opening
of the door when the appliance is in operation.
When the power supply is disconnected, the door remains locked for 2-
3 minutes to ensure that the drum comes to a stop before the door is
opened.
In more complex versions, the safety interlock also performs the following functions:
• By means of a pneumatic actuator it maintains the latch closed when there is water in the tub.
• It also acts as a support for the door aperture levers when aperture is effected using the pushbutton.
• The "door closed" pilot lamp may also be fitted using a special support.
1. P.T.C.
2. Bi-metal strips
3. Contact in rest position
4. Contact closed
The PTC is a ceramic resistor whose internal resistance

increases with the temperature.
In this device, the PTC is used to heat the bi-metal
strips. The temperature deforms the two strips (from A
to B), thus moving the lever which closes the contact of
the main switch.
At the same time, the latch, which is actioned by the
contact plate, moves outwards to block the lever in
position. This procedure takes place within 5 seconds
after power is supplied.
When the power supply is disconnected, the PTC cools
(1 - 2 minutes), and the strips return to their original
position, thus opening the contact and releasing the
lever.
1. Latch
2. Lever
8.4.1.1 Version with door aperture system
On certain models, the door can be opened by pressing

a button on the control panel.
In this case, the safety device is fitted with a series of
levers that release the latch.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 63 599 35 23-17

A Common contact
B PTC power supply contact
C Main switch contact

Connector
8.4.4 Version with pneumatic device

(certain models only)
1. Air intake aperture

2. Membrane
3. Latch
4. Spring
5. Lever
A tube connects the door delay device to the filter body. When the pressure on the membrane is greater
than the force exerted by the counterspring (100 ± 30 column water mm), the latch remains extended,
blocking the lever in position.
THE DOOR DOES NOT OPEN AT THE END OF THE CYCLE:

- Operate the washing machine so that the door delay device is powered for about 30 seconds.
- Switch off the appliance. The door should be released within about 2 minutes. If not, the door
interlock is faulty.
THE APPLIANCE DOES NOT START AND/OR THE PORTHOLE DOOR IS NOT LOCKED:
- Operate the appliance for about 5 minutes.
- Switch off for 2 minutes.
- Switch the appliance on again. The appliance should start within no more than 5 seconds, and the
door should be locked. If not, check that the device is correctly powered (wiring - main switch -
timer), and replace if necessary.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 64 599 35 23-17

8.5 Instantaneous door safety interlock
Certain models with electronic control systems feature an

instantaneous door safety interlock. In this case, the door can
be opened as soon as the drum comes to a stop.
8.5.2 Operating principle
1. Solenoid protective PTC

2. Solenoid valve
3. Lever mechanism
4. Camme
5. Bi-metal PTC
6. Electrical contacts (main switch)
7. Locking latch
• When the appliance is switched on by pressing the ON/OFF button, the bi-metal PTC is powered; the
camme is in a position that prevents the locking latch from moving outwards.
• When the programme is started by pressing START/PAUSE, the main PCB sends a signal (duration 20
msec) to the solenoid (at least 6 seconds after switching on), which causes the camme to rotate one
position. The latch which locks the lever of the door safety interlock is raised and, at the same time, the
contacts of the main switch are closed, thus powering all the electrical components.
• At the end of the programme, the PCB sends two signals (at an interval of 200 msec) (duration 20
msec):
- the first signal moves the camme by another position, though the latch is not released.
- the second signal (which is sent only if the system functions correctly) moves the camme by a
further position, which causes the latch to retract, thus releasing the device; at the same time, the
contacts of the main switch are opened.
8.5.2.1 "Door open" conditions

The main PCB, before sending the door aperture signals, checks for the following conditions:
• The drum must be stationary (no signal from the tachymetric generator)
• The water level must not be higher than the lower edge of the door
• The temperature of the water must not be higher than 40º C.
8.5.2.2 Automatic release device

In the event of a power failure, or if the appliance is switched off using the ON/OFF switch, or if there is a
fault in the solenoid valve, the bi-metal PTC cools within a period of between 55 seconds and about 4
minutes (at a temperature of 65°C), thus releasing the door.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 65 599 35 23-17

8.5.2.3 Protective cut-out for solenoid valve
A PTC, connected in series to the solenoid valve, serves as a current limiter (i.e. overheating cut-out) in the
following cases:
→ If the triac on the main PCB is short-circuited
→ If the START/PAUSE button is pressed repeatedly (more than 10 times)
8.5.4 Circuit diagram
1. Main switch
2. Solenoid valve
3. PTC protective solenoid valve cut-out
4. Bi-metal PTC
6. Connector
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 66 599 35 23-17

8.6 Solenoid valve
The solenoid valve ducts water through the detergent dispenser, and is
controlled electrically by the pressure switch.
1. Water intake
2. Solenoid valve body
3. Filter
4. Flow reducer
5. Coil
6. Spring
7. Moving core
8. Rubber seal
10. Membrane
11. Water outlet
When at rest, the core, upon which pressure is exerted by a spring, holds the hole in the centre of the
membrane closed; as a result, the membrane hermetically closes off access to the water intake duct.
When the coil is powered, it attracts the core, which therefore opens the small hole in the centre of the
membrane, and the valve opens.
Various types of solenoid valve may be fitted:

→ solenoid valves with one inlet and one outlet
→ solenoid valves with one inlet and two or three outlets. In this case, each section of the solenoid valve is
controlled by a coil.
Cold water solenoid valve

The cold water solenoid valve is fitted to all models, and has a nominal delivery of about 6.5 - 9.5 litres
per minute. The water pressure must be between 3 and 100 N/cm2.
Hot water solenoid valve

The hot water solenoid valve is added to the cold water valve on models designed for hot water fill. Its
nominal delivery is about 5 - 6 litres per minute.
Condensation solenoid valve

This solenoid valve, with one inlet and two or three outlets, is used in
washer-dryers.
One section is used for the introduction of cold water; the other, whose
delivery is about 0.4 litres per minute, is used for condensation of the
steam during the drying phase.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 67 599 35 23-17

WATER FILL CONTINUES WHEN THE APPLIANCE IS SWITCHED OFF:

- Solenoid valve jammed mechanically. Replace the solenoid valve
WATER FILL CONTINUES DURING THE WASHING CYCLE:

- Check the hydraulic circuit of the pressure switch and the pressure switch itself.
NO WATER FILL:
1. The solenoid valve vibrates (noise from the coil) but does not introduce water:
- check the hydraulic circuit that supplies the solenoid valve (tap turned off, insufficient mains water
pressure, fill hose kinked or obstructed).
2. The solenoid valve does not vibrate:

- Check the coil winding (3500 - 4500 ohm); if faulty, replace the solenoid valve.
- Check the hydraulic circuit of the pressure switch and the pressure switch itself
- Check the timer and/or the main PCB for correct operation.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 68 599 35 23-17

8.7 Pressure switch

The function of the pressure switch is to determine the quantity of water to
be introduced into the tub. In other words:
Ö It controls the water fill levels during the washing phases.
Ö It acts as an anti-boiling safety device when connected in series to the
heating element.
Ö It can also act as an anti-overflow safety device if connected in series to
the drain pump.
Ö It can act as an anti-foam device during the spin phases.
1. Air inlet aperture

2. Diaphragm
3. Internal chamber
4. Contact strip (rapid cut-in)
5. Level regulation screw
6. Differential regulation screw
The internal chamber is connected via a small tube to the pressure chamber. When water is introduced into
the tub, the pressure in this chamber increases. When the pressure reaches a pre-determined level, the
membrane causes the contact strip to trip (rapid-action), which switches the contact from "empty" to "full".
Two regulation screws are fitted to the cover, one for the level, the other for the differential, i.e. the point at
which the strip returns to the "empty" position when the level of water in the tub decreases.
8.7.2 Pressure switch hydraulic circuit
1. Pressure switches
2. Tub
3. Filter body
4. Pressure chamber on filter body
5. Pressure chamber on the tube between the tub
and the filter body
6. Pressure switch tubes
Normally, all appliances are fitted with one or two

pressure switches (in rare cases, an appliance may
feature three pressure switches). Each pressure
switch controls from one to three levels of water in
the tub.
The small tube from the pressure switches may be
connected to the pressure chamber, which is located
beneath the tub (this is the most common solution) or
to that on the filter body.
One or two pressure switches may be connected to
the pressure chamber, depending on the model.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 69 599 35 23-17

Tub empty Water flows into the tub Water is drained from the tub
As there is no water in the tub, When the connection between the As the level of water in the tub
there is no pressure on the tub and the pressure chamber is diminishes, the pressure exerted
diaphragm, which thus remains in interrupted by the water, the on the diaphragm is reduced.
the lower position due to the pressure between the pressure The diaphragm is pushed
counterforce exerted by the chamber and the internal chamber downwards by the counterspring
spring. of the pressure switch increases. until the switch resets (i.e. returns
In this position, the contact is This increase continues until the to the "empty" position).
closed on "empty". diaphragm is raised sufficiently to
action the switch (rapid-action). In
this position, the contact is closed
on "full".
1. Common contact
2. Contact closed on "empty"
4. Contact closed on "full"
11-21-31: "Common" contact
12-22-32: "Empty" contact
14-24-34: "Full" contact
Correct operation of the pressure switch depends on the correct operation of its hydraulic circuit
(tube and pressure chamber):
• Check for leaks (in which case too much water would be introduced, as the switch would not close on
"full" or, in the event of microleakage, would return to "empty".
• Check for obstruction (in which case the contacts may be jammed on "full" or "empty").
After checking the hydraulic circuit:

• Introduce water into the tub to the highest level and check that the contacts close correctly on "full".
• Drain the water from the tub and check that the contacts close correctly on "empty".
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 70 599 35 23-17

8.8 Analogue (electronic) pressure switch
The electronic pressure switch is an analogue device whose function

is to control the level of water in the tub; it is used in certain models
with electronic control systems (EWM2000 - MWM1.5).
The electronic circuit is connected directly to the main PCB.
1. Air intake tube

2. Membrane
3. Coil
4. Electronic circuit (oscillator)
5. Core
6. Spring
7. Calibration spring
8. Connector
The pressure switch is connected via tube to the pressure chamber.

When water is introduced into the tub, this creates a pressure inside the hydraulic circuit that causes the
membrane to change position. This movement of the membrane modifies the position of the core inside the
coil, varying its inductance and thus the frequency of the oscillating circuit.
The PCB recognizes how much water has been introduced into the tub according to the frequency.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 71 599 35 23-17

8.8.4 Circuit diagrams and operating frequency
Version for MWM1.5 control systems Version for EWM2000 control systems
In the event of a fault in the pressure switch, the operation of the appliance is immediately interrupted.
Where possible, always read the alarm code.
Possible alarm codes caused by faults in the pressure switch:
MWM 1.5: E30, E32, E33, E36

EWM2000: E31, E32,E33, E34, E35
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 72 599 35 23-17

8.9 Water distributor

The water distributor is used in models with MWM electronic control systems, and performs the following
functions:
It actions the levers in the detergent dispenser in order to duct water through the various compartments
during the course of the washing cycle.
Drawing power from the main PCB, it powers the following components:
Ö Cold water solenoid valve
Ö Circulation pump
Ö Drain pump
1. PCB
2. Water distributor
3. Detergent dispenser lever system
The water distributor is actioned and controlled by the electronic control system. The motor of the distributor
is powered via a triac on the main PCB.
Before the motor is switched on, all the loads are disconnected from the power supply in order to reduce
wear of the contacts.
The motor is powered only for the time necessary to move the levers from one position to the next.
During the washing programme, the distributor may perform several complete rotations in order to move to
the positions necessary for the completion of the cycle.
1. Motor
2. Gearwheel
3. Camme
4. Lever actioning arm
5. Brush contacts
6. Contact base
7. Casing
8. Cover
The motor (1), when powered, moves the camme (3) by means of the gears (2). The camme moves the arm
that moves the lever actioning arm (4).
The camme is fitted with brush contacts (5) which slide in contact with the copper tracks on the contact base
(6). The contacts close in different ways (see diagram) depending on the position of the camme.
The camme requires 15 seconds to perform one complete rotation. As the contact base is divided into 36
sections, passage from one position to the next requires about 0.4 seconds.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 73 599 35 23-17

A = Pre-wash
B = Wash
C = Bleach
D = Conditioner
Contact base Position of lever
8.9.4 Contact closure diagram
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 74 599 35 23-17

8.10 Induction (asynchronous) motors
The function of the motor is to rotate the drum at different speeds:

Ö high speed for the spin phases
Ö low speed for the wash phases
The primary characteristics of these motors is that they do not

require a start-up current. Instead, the current in the rotor builds up
by induction, hence the name "induction" motor. These motors are
also termed "asynchronous" because the speed of rotation is not the
same as the synchronization speed.
1. Shield
2. Bearing
3. Rotor
4. Stator
The rotor is of the "squirrel cage" type, in which the die-cast aluminium windings are housed in special
grooves in the plate pack.
The starting torque of single-phase asynchronous motors is very low. This is offset by adding a start-up
circuit which is phase-shifted by 90° with respect to the running circuit.
This 90° current phase shift is provided by a capacitor which is connected in series to the start-up winding.
This generates a rotary field that is sufficient to create the starting torque.
The stator consists of four windings:

Ö two high-speed two-pole windings for operation during spin phases: a start-up winding and a running
winding, with the capacitor connected in series. High-speed rotation of the drum is always in the same
direction (counter-clockwise).
Ö two low-speed windings for operation during washing phases. These have 12 or 16 poles, and are
identical in structural terms.
Type of Motor speed (rpm at 50Hz) Drum rotation speed (rpm)

Capacitor (µF)
motor Wash Spin Wash Spin
2/12 poles 14 ~ 400 ~ 2800 ~ 55 ~ 400
2/16 poles 16/18 ~ 300 ~ 2800 ~ 55 ~ 500/550
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 75 599 35 23-17

8.10.2 Reversal of direction of rotation during washing
The windings are designed to provide rotation in both directions, depending on the way in which the
capacitor is connected. Each functions alternately as a primary winding and start-up winding. When reverse
rotation is required, the switching contact of the timer reverses the connection of the capacitor between the
two windings, thus reversing the direction of rotation.
Motor stopped Clockwise rotation Counter-clockwise rotation
Motor Capacitor
Motor with traditional connection Motor with suppressor connection
A - B Low-speed windings C - Common low-speed winding

D - High-speed running windings E - High-speed running winding
P - Overload cut-out
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 76 599 35 23-17

8.10.5 Motor with speed variator
On certain models, spin speeds from 600 to 800 rpm can be obtained
using a motor fitted with a speed variator (the speed during the washing
phase is always 55 rpm).
1. Motor
2. Speed variator
Low speed High speed

The motor pulley consists of two disks: the first is attached to the
motor drive shaft, while the second can move axially.
At high speeds, the increased rate of rotation of the shaft (two-pole
winding), and the consequent thrust exerted by the centrifugal
mass, causes the moving disk to change position.
As a consequence, the diameter of the pulley is modified, and the
transmission ratio between the motor pulley and the drum pulley is
altered. The drum will therefore rotate at 600 rpm with the 2/12
motor, or 800 rpm with the 2/16 motor.
1. Moving disk
2. Fixed disk
3. Drive belt
4. Centrifugal mass

INOPERATIVE AT LOW SPEED :
- measure the resistance of the windings. If correct, check the capacitor.
INOPERATIVE AT HIGH SPEED:

INOPERATIVE AT HIGH SPEED AND LOW SPEED:

IRREGULAR OPERATION (motor overheating cut-out):

- operate the appliance until the problem occurs, then measure the resistance of the windings.
POWER LINE CUT-OUT INTERVENES:

- check whether any of the windings / components are connected to earth or inadequately earthed, using
a tester with a minimum scale of 40 MΩ across each terminal and the casing (correct reading is ∞).
NOISE (Bearings-Magnetics-Drive belt):

- disconnect the drive belt to identify the source of the noise.
Checking for efficiency of the motor capacitor
DOES NOT START UP IN LOW SPEED AND HIGH SPEED OPERATION (noise):
- use an ohmmeter (capacitance meter) to check that the capacitor is not faulty.
OCCASIONALLY FAILS TO START UP AT HIGH SPEED (inadequate capacitance):

- use an ohmmeter (capacitance meter) to measure the capacitance of the capacitor.
THE MOTOR DOES NOT START:

- use an ohmmeter (capacitance meter) to check whether the capacitor is short-circuited.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 77 599 35 23-17

8.11 Commutator motor

Commutator motors are fitted to appliances with spin speeds of
between 600 and 1,600 rpm.
These motors are manufactured by:
• SOLE (formerly ZEM)
• FHP (formerly AEG)
• CESET
It is possible that motors produced by manufacturers other than the

original manufacturer may have the same part number, but these are
perfectly interchangeable.
1. Stator
2. Terminal block
3. Commutator
4. Tachymetric generator magnet
5. Tachymetric generator coil
6. Brush
1. Stator
2. Stator winding
3. Brush
4. Commutator
5. Rotor winding
6. Motor drive shaft
7. Pulley
8. Bearing
9. Tachymetric generator coil
10. Magnet
11. Spring

The stator winding is connected in series to the rotor winding (i.e. they are energized in series).
Each section of the rotor winding is connected to a pair of commutator plates (also called "commutators").
The electrical contact between the commutator and the fixed circuit is provided by two brushes which slide in
contact with the commutator plates.
The speed of rotation of the motor is proportional to the power voltage supplied by an electronic control
system.
This is also known as a "universal" motor, since it can be powered either by alternating or direct current.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 78 599 35 23-17

8.11.2.1 Control of the speed of the motor
Speed control is obtained by using an electronic control system to vary the voltage (V) applied to the
motor.
The technique used consists of a "phase division" performed by the Triac. A Triac is a bi-directional
electronic switch. Closure of the circuit between A1 and A2 (anodes) takes place in the presence of the
appropriate signals received by the gate (G).
Start-up signals
Voltage to motor
8.11.2.2 Direction of motor rotation

The direction of rotation of the motor depends on the way in which the rotor and stator are connected
together. This connection is performed by two of the timer contacts or by the relays on the PCB.
Clockwise rotation Counter-clockwise rotation
EC Electronic control
system
P Motor overload
cut-out
S Stator
R Rotor
T Tachymetric
generator
TY Triac
R1,2 Reversal relay
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 79 599 35 23-17

8.11.2.3 Tachymetric generator
As in all motors powered in series, the speed of the commutator motor depends on the load. In other words,
its speed diminishes as the load increases This makes it necessary to ensure that the power voltage to the
motor, and therefore its speed, be constantly controlled by an electronic speed control system.
A tachymetric generator (consisting of a magnet fitted to the shaft and a coil) generates a voltage that
depends on the speed of the rotor, which is transmitted to the electronic control system.
All electronic control systems feature a system of protection (which may be more or less refined) to prevent
operation of the motor in the event of a fault in the tachymetric generator.
M Electronic control system

P Motor overload cut-out
S Stator
R Rotor
T Tachymetric generator
TY Triac
R1,2 Reversal relay
Stator Rotor Tachymetric generator Overheating cut-out
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 80 599 35 23-17

P = Motor overload cut-out

R = Rotor
S = Stator
T = Tachymetric generator
1. Check the connector blocks (wiring) and check for any bent or detached terminals.
2. Check for traces / residue / deposits of water or detergent and identify their source.
3. Check for any windings / components connected to mass or inadequately earthed using a tester with a
minimum scale of 40mW across each terminal and the casing (correct reading is ∞).
4. Check the individual windings against the values shown in the table below:
Terminals on
motor Components to be SOLE motor F.H.P. motor CE.SE.T. motor
connector checked [ Ω] [ Ω] [ Ω]
block
171 ÷ 196
Tachymetric generator
3-4 126 ÷ 147 64 ÷ 73
winding 469 ÷ 540
Stator winding
5 - 10 1.0 ÷ 2.2 1.0 ÷ 3.0 1.0 ÷ 2.0
(full range)
6-7 Overload cut-out 0 0 0
8-9 Rotor winding (④) 1.5 ÷ 3.0 1.5 ÷ 3.0 1.5 ÷ 3.0
Stator winding (half range
1 - 10 0.5 ÷ 1.0 0.5 ÷ 1.5 0.5 ÷ 1.0
if terminal 1 is present)
(④) excluding the resistance of the brushes
Notes:
- When checking the rotor winding, measurement should be effected around the entire surface, turning
the spindle very slowly and checking for any short-circuits between visible plates. Also check the carbon
brushes for wear.
- If noise is generated (bearings-magnet-belt), detach the drive belt from the pulleys and locate the
source.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 81 599 35 23-17

8.12 AC/DC converter
This component is fitted only to certain models with electronic

control, and serves to convert the alternating current generated
by the triac on the main PCB into direct current used to power the
drum rotation motor.
L1 1.2 mH
R1 68 KΩ
R2-R3 100 Ω
D1 25A/400 - 600V
C1-C2 47nF
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 82 599 35 23-17

8.13 Heating element
The heating element that heats the washing water is

encapsulated, i.e. inserted into a watertight stainless
steel tubular casing. Typical power ratings:
1500W
1950W
2500W
3000W
(some models may be fitted with heating elements with

different power ratings)
1. Tubular casing
2. Connector
3. Filament heating element
4. Insulation
8.13.1.1 Version with NTC sensor

In certain models with electronic control systems or hybrid timers, the temperature sensor is fitted to the
heating element.
1. Heating element
2. NTC sensor
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 83 599 35 23-17

8.13.1.2 Seal
The seal between the tub and the heating element is provided by a seal which expands against the nut.
1. Fixed flange
2. Washer
3. Moving flange
4. Nut
5. Heating element terminals

DOES NOT HEAT:
- check that the heating element is not broken: measure the resistance across the two terminals.
INTERVENTION OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY CUT-OUTS:

- use an ohmmeter to check that the heating element is not connected to mass and check for current
leakage (40 MΩ)
WATER LEAKS:
- check that the seal is correctly positioned and fitted.
VIBRATION OR METALLIC NOISE WHEN THE DRUM ROTATES:

- check that the heating element is correctly positioned inside the tub. If worn, replace the heating
element.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 84 599 35 23-17

8.14 Heat exchanger
1. External casing
2. Heat exchanger
3. Heating element
4. Thermostat
In certain Jetsystem models, the water is heated by a heat exchanger (not recent models).
The heat exchanger consists of a cylindrical body in aluminium alloy, lined with a layer of "teflon" to prevent
the formation of scale. The water to be heated flows through the heat exchanger.
The armoured spiral-shaped heating element is located inside the cylinder. A safety thermostat is positioned
in close contact with the heat exchanger. The thermostat (normally-closed) is calibrated to intervene at a
temperature of 220°C, and is connected in series to the heating element.
The external casing protects the heat exchanger unit.
DOES NOT HEAT:

- check that the safety thermostat is normally closed.

leakage (40 MΩ)
WATER LEAKS:
- check that the seal is correctly positioned and fitted.
NO RE-CIRCULATION/DOES NOT HEAT:

- check that the heat exchanger is not blocked.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 85 599 35 23-17

8.15 Drying heater (washer-dryers)
The armoured drying heater is inserted into a watertight stainless steel tubular casing, and consists of two
branches:
when drying cotton fabrics, both heating elements are switched on (full power).
when drying synthetic fabrics, only one element is switched on (half-power) to ensure delicate drying.
Typical electrical power ratings (depending on

the model):
1000+1000W
700+700W
700+400W
550+550W
DOES NOT HEAT:


leakage (40 MΩ).
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 86 599 35 23-17

8.16 Bi-metal thermostats
This type of thermostat, which exists in various versions with one or two contacts (normally closed or
normally open) is utilized for a number of applications:
control of the temperature of the washing water

control of the temperature of the drying air
as a safety device for overheating during washing and/or drying.

When the bi-metal disk reaches the temperature at which the thermostat has been calibrated, it trips,
causing a lever to open (or close, depending on the version) the contacts.
During the cooling phase, the bi-metal disk returns to its original position at a pre-determined reset
temperature.
1. Steel capsule
2. Bi-metal disk
3. Contact
4. Spring
5. High-temperature lever
6. Low-temperature lever
Normally-closed Normally-open Manual reset
8.16.4 Manual-reset thermostat

In certain applications (such as washer-dryers), manual-reset safety thermostats are fitted. In this case, the
bi-metal element, after tripping as a result of overheating, does not reset automatically to its original position
when it cools.
It is necessary to press the corresponding button manually to reset the bi-metal element.
1. Use a tester to check that, when cold, the contacts are in the correct position.
2. Heat the thermostat bulb and check for correct switching of the contacts.
3. Allow the thermostat to cool and check that the contacts return to their original position.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 87 599 35 23-17

8.17 Adjustable thermostat

Thermostats are used to control and regulate the
temperature of the washing water.
Some thermostats are based on the fluid expansion
effect, and their intervention temperatures can be
adjusted.
1. Bulb
2. Capillary
3. Capillary sheath
4. Thermostat body
5. Contact
Thermostats function according to the principle of the

expansion of the fluid contained in the hydraulic circuit.
When the bulb is heated, the liquid in the capillary tube
expands against the membrane.
The movement of the membrane actions a device that
opens or closes the contacts. The spindle can be used to
adjust the temperature at which switching of the contacts
occurs (0-90°C).
1. Bulb
2. Capillary
3. Regulation screw
4. Membrane
5. Rocker arm
6. Contact
1. Use a tester to check that, when cold, the contacts are in the correct position (normally closed).
2. Heat the thermostat bulb and check for correct switching of the contacts.
3. Allow the thermostat to cool and check that the contacts return to their original position.
4. Check that the thermostat capillary is correctly secured to the tub and that the coils are present.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 88 599 35 23-17

8.18 NTC temperature sensor

In certain models (i.e. those with hybrid or electronic timers), an NTC sensor is used to control the washing
temperature. In these sensors, the internal resistance decreases as the temperature increases. This
reduction in resistance is detected by the electronic control system which, when the desired temperature is
reached, disconnects the heating element. Two types of sensor are produced; their shapes are different, but
their characteristics are identical.
NTC sensors are used in electronic washer-dryers to control the temperature and to calculate the drying
time.
1. Plastic casing
2. Metal capsule
3. NTC resistor
4. Terminals
1. NTC resistor
2. Metal capsule
3. Terminals
4. Plastic casing
TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Ω)

(ºC) Rated value Maximum value Minimum value
20 6050 6335 5765
60 1250 1278 1222
80 640 620 660
Use a tester to check that the resistance of the sensor corresponds to the temperature.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 89 599 35 23-17

8.19 Drain pump

The function of the drain pump is to discharge the water at the end of
each phase of the washing cycle. These centrifugal pumps are
actioned by a synchronous motor.
1. Impeller
2. Rotor
3. Stator
The rotor consists of a permanent magnet, and may rotate in either direction.
The rotor may rotate for approximately 15 minutes without actioning the impeller. As a result, if the impeller
is jammed by a foreign body, the rotor may perform short clockwise and anti-clockwise movements until the
blockage is removed.
These pumps have a delivery of about 22-25 litres per minute, and a maximum head of 90 cm.
1. Check that the impeller is not jammed and check for slippage.
2. Check the resistance of the stator winding, which should be approximately 150/200 Ω.
Important!
If caused to run empty (i.e. disconnected from the hydraulic circuit), synchronous pumps may fail to start up.
This is because, due to their structural characteristics, they require a counter-torque on the impeller to allow
the rotor to turn in one direction or the other.
For this reason, the pumps should be tested only when fitted to the appliance and after introducing a certain
quantity of water.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 90 599 35 23-17

8.20 Circulation pump

Jetsystem models are fitted with a synchronous circulation
pump which continuously circulates the water from the filter
body into the tub through the bellows seal.
In certain models (those fitted with a heat exchanger, but not

more recent models) the temperature control thermostats may
be fitted to the circulation pump.
1. Water circulation outlet (delivery 8,5 - 12.5 l/min)

2. Secondary outlet (if featured)
3. Temperature control thermostats (certain models only)
NO RE-CIRCULATION - POOR WASHING RESULTS

1. Check that the impeller is not jammed and check for slippage.
2. Check the resistance of the stator winding, which should be approximately 150/200 Ω.
WATER IN THE BASE AND ON THE FLOOR

Check the seals on the duct/thermostat holes
Important!
If caused to run empty (i.e. disconnected from the hydraulic circuit), synchronous pumps may fail to start up.
This is because, due to their structural characteristics, they require a counter-torque on the impeller to allow
the rotor to turn in one direction or the other.
For this reason, the pumps should be tested only when fitted to the appliance and after introducing a certain
quantity of water.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 91 599 35 23-17

8.21 Drying timer (washer-dryers)

The timer is a timing device that powers the components needed for
the drying cycle; it is used in models with electromechanical and
hybrid timers.
Actuation is by the contacts, which are actioned by a series of
cammes. The cammes are actioned mechanically by a synchronous
motor.
The timer consists of two parts:
1. cotton/linen drying: both drying heaters are switched on
alternately (full power)
2. drying synthetic fabrics: only one of the drying heaters is
switched on (half power).
The drying phase, which depends on the timer code, generally lasts
up to 120 minutes; the last 10-12 minutes are dedicated to the cooling
phase.
Important: Do not attempt to turn the timer counter-clockwise!
8.21.3 Contact closure diagram
1. Check the timer motor windings for continuity.

2. Check that the contacts close as shown in the specific diagram relative to the timer.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 92 599 35 23-17

8.22 Fan motor (washer-dryers)
The motor which actions the air circulation fan for the drying phase is of the single-phase asynchronous
type. The rotor is of the "squirrel cage" type. The velocity of the shaft is approximately 2,800 rpm at a
voltage of 220-240V/50Hz.
1. Rotor
2. Stator
3. Cooling fan
4. Pulley

FAN INOPERATIVE:
- Check that the rotor is not jammed.
- Check the pulley for slippage.
- Measure the resistance of the stator.
EXCESSIVE NOISE:
- Check for friction of the rotor.
- Check the bearings.
- Check the drive belt.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 93 599 35 23-17

8.23 Circuit diagrams
Each model produced is accompanied by a wiring diagram and a basic circuit diagram.
8.23.1 Wiring diagram

An example of a wiring diagram is shown below. The wiring diagram may be used to check for correct
connection of the wiring connectors to the various electrical components.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 94 599 35 23-17

8.23.1.1 Wiring
Two types of wiring harness are used for the various models:
• Modular: the wiring harness consists of a series of sections fitted with connectors.
• Single: the wiring consists of a single main harness. There may be separate wires for connection to
earth.
8.23.1.2 Part numbers for wiring

The various types of wiring harness are available as spare parts. The various codes are shown in the
electrical components section under reference no. 999.
Example:
Position Part number Description

999 124 11 05-00 / 4 wiring
999 124 34 04-00 / 9 earth wiring
999 124 90 12-31 / 9 power cable, 2000x3x1.5
999 124 93 31-50 / 3 wiring, FLAT CABLE
999 124 96 35-10 / 1 wiring
999 132 02 00-00 / 7 wiring
999 132 02 01-01 / 3 wiring
999 132 02 02-01 / 1 wiring
999 132 02 03-00 / 1 wiring
999 132 02 11-20 / 2 wiring
In order to identify the correct spare part, use the wiring diagram to identify the part number shown
alongside the wiring to be ordered; this number corresponds to the first 8 digits of the part number shown in
the list.
In the case of the wiring for the motor, for example, the wiring diagram shows code 132.02112, which
corresponds to the first 8 digits of part number 132 02 11-20 / 2
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 95 599 35 23-17

8.23.2 Basic circuit diagram
An example of a basic circuit diagram is shown below. The circuit diagram should be used to check the
appliance for correct operation in the diagnostics phase (in conjunction with the timer diagram, if present).
Wire Timer connector
Internal connection to
Timer motor
timer or component
Slow camme Fast camme
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 96 599 35 23-17

9 ACCESS TO COMPONENTS
9.1 Work-top
a. Remove the two rear screws (1), push the work-top towards the rear of
the appliance and detach.
9.1.1 Pressure switch

a. Remove the work-top
b. Detach the wiring connectors
c. Press the anchor tabs (2) and pull towards the rear
d. Detach the pressure switch tube
e. To remove the second pressure switch (if featured, this is inside the
cross-member), press the anchor tabs and push towards the front
panel.
9.1.2 Suppressor/motor capacitor

a. Remove the work-top.
b. Detach the wiring support from the cross-member and move
downwards (3).
c. Remove the suppressor/capacitor from its housing in the cross-member
d. Detach the wiring connectors.
9.1.3 Solenoid valve (version fitted to the cabinet)

b. Unscrew the water fill hose from the solenoid valve
c. Detach the wiring connector.
d. Detach the solenoid valve from the support (4)
e. Remove the hose clamp and detach the solenoid valve from the hose
9.1.4 Solenoid valve (version fitted to detergent dispenser)

b. Unscrew the water fill hose from the extension/solenoid valve
c. Lift the rear cable clamp block and detach from the extension/solenoid
valve (5)
d. Remove the screw and detach the solenoid valve support bracket from
the detergent dispenser (6)
e. Extract the solenoid valve/extension assembly from the detergent
dispenser (7)
f. Detach the wiring connector
g. Unscrew the solenoid valve from the extension.
When re-assembling:
The seal between the solenoid valve and the detergent dispenser should
be inserted before the solenoid valve and lubricated with soapy water or
silicone oil to facilitate insertion.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 97 599 35 23-17

9.2 Control panel (standard version)
8 9 10
9.2.1 Control panel – versions for “soft” cabinet

b. Extract the detergent drawer (8)
c. Remove the screws that secure the control panel to the control panel
support (9)
d. For models with knobs external to the control panel: release the knob
12
cover by pressing the hole gently with a small screwdriver and turning
the knob cover counter-clockwise (10)
e. Remove the screws which secure the control panel to the cross-
member and release the anchor tabs from the support (12)
f. Release the control panel from the lower right-hand guide and
remove. To facilitate its release, unscrew the screw which secures it
to the cabinet and lift the control panel support slightly (13 or 14).
g. Remove the pilot lamp from its housing in the control panel and (for
electronic models) disconnect the wiring connectors from the PCB. 13
When re-assembling: Ensure that the knobs/flanges are positioned
correctly!
9.2.2 Control panel – versions for “square” cabinets

b. Extract the detergent drawer (8)
c. Remove the screws which secure the control panel to the control
panel support (9)
d. For models on which the knobs are external to the control panel:
release the knob cover by pressing the hole gently with a small 14
screwdriver and turning the knob cover counter-clockwise (10-11)
e. Remove the front-mounted screws which secure the control panel
support to the cabinet (13 or 14) and, if present, those that secure the
control panel (12).
f. If present, remove the internal screw that secures the control panel to
the support.
g. Release the tabs which anchor the control panel to the support (15-
16) and remove the control panel. To facilitate this operation, lift the
support to release the lower anchor tabs on the control panel (17).
h. Remove the pilot lamp from its housing in the control panel and (for
electronic models) disconnect the wiring connectors from the PCB.
When re-assembling: Ensure that the knobs/flanges are positioned
correctly!
16 17
15
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 98 599 35 23-17

9.2.3 Timer
Version with internal knobs on control panel:
a. Remove the work-top.

b. Remove the control panel
c. If present, remove the screw that secures the knob-spindle (or
coupling) and remove the knob.
d. Remove the two screws which secure the timer to the cross-member
(18). 18
e. Detach the wiring connectors and remove the timer.
Version with external knobs on control panel:
a. Remove the control panel

b. Remove the knob:
Ö Release the knob cover by pressing gently in the hole with a
small screwdriver and turning the knob cover counter-
clockwise (versions 10-11). 10
Ö Insert a screwdriver from the interior of the support cross-
member (version 19) and remove the knob
c. Remove the screw which secures the knob-spindle (or
coupling) and remove the knob (20)
d. Detach the programme flange from the camme (if featured).
e. Remove the two screws which secure the timer to the cross-
member (18)
f. Detach the wiring connectors and extract the timer.
9.2.4 Water distribution camme

a. Remove the control panel and the timer.
b. Detach the camme from the cross-member. 19
9.2.5 Detergent dispenser lever mechanism feeler arm
20
a. Remove the camme
b. Use a cross-head screwdriver to turn the latch 90°.
c. Detach the latch from the cross-member and remove the
feeler arm.
9.2.6 Push-button
21
b. Using a screwdriver, widen the pushbutton anchor pin and remove the pushbutton.
c. Remove the pushbutton. Using pliers, close the anchor tabs which secure the button to the cross-
member and push towards the interior of the appliance.
d. Detach the connector
9.2.7 Adjustable thermostat

22
a. Remove the knob:
Ö Remove the control panel (if internal)
Ö Use a screwdriver from inside the support cross-member (if type 19)
Ö Release the knob cover by pressing gently in the hole with a small
screwdriver and turning the knob cover counter-clockwise (versions 10-11)
b. Remove the coupling from the thermostat spindle or remove the knob (22)
c. Detach the connectors
d. Detach the thermostat body from the plastic support and remove from the
internal side
e. Detach the bulb from the tub (see Access to the thermostat: 9.5.3)
f. Remove the capillary from the retaining clamps
When re-assembling, secure the capillary using the original clamp and loop
to form a number of spirals.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 99 599 35 23-17

9.3 Electronic control systems
9.3.1 Main PCB (MWM-EWM2000)

23 24
a. Remove the top.
b. Remove the screws which secure the support to the
board casing (23-24)
c. Detach the wiring from the supports
d. Extract the casing-PCB assembly
e. Detach the connectors
9.3.2 Control/display board

The way in which these boards are fastened depends on the styling version and the type of electronic
control system (MWM user interface, EWM2000 or EWM1000 electronic board). To access the board:
b. Release the PCB casing from the control panel or remove the screws.
For further details, refer to the specific Service Manuals for the various types of electronic control systems.
9.3.3 Control panel – “input” version
25 26
27
a. Remove the top (18) 28

b. Remove the detergent drawer
c. Remove the screws (19)
d. Detach the wiring connectors from the PCB (20)
e. Use a screwdriver to release the tab which anchors the the control
panel to the support (21) and remove the control panel from the
appliance.
9.3.4 Electronic pressure switch 29

a. Remove the top
b. Press down the anchor tabs and release the pressure switch from
the support.
c. Detach the connector
d. Detach the tube.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 100 599 35 23-17

9.4 Access from the porthole door
30
9.4.1 Porthole door
a. Remove the two screws which secure the door to the hinge (30)
b. Remove the screws which secure the surround-flange (if present)
and detach the flange from the surround.
c. Remove the glass door panel.
d. Remove the handle-latch assembly
Re-assembly:
e. Position the handle assembly in its housing in the flange so that
the spring exerts pressure correctly.
f. Refit the glass panel to the flange.
g. Replace the surround and the screws.
9.4.2 Porthole door hinge

a. Remove the porthole door.
b. Detach the seal front the front panel (31)
c. Remove the screws which secure the hinge to the front panel.
d. Remove the hinge. 31
9.4.3 Door safety interlock

a. Remove the seal from the front panel (31)
b. Remove the two screws which secure the door delay device to the
front panel.
c. Remove the door delay device (32)
d. Remove the cover from the door delay device. 32
e. In models with button-actioned aperture (standard on P66 32cm
models), detach the wire which controls door aperture.
f. Detach the wiring connectors (33)
9.4.4 Bellows seal

a. Detach the retaining ring and the seal from the front panel.
b. Remove the clamp and pull out the circulation tube (if featured) (78)
c. Remove the seal and the ring by pulling downwards (it is held in
position by an elastic ring) 33
Re-assembly:
a. Use soap and water to lubricate the seat of the seal where it comes into contact with the flange and the
metal ring.
b. Fit the seal to the flange with the drainage hole at the bottom and the internal reference notch at the top
(59).
c. Replace the metal retaining ring (check that the ring is in good condition, otherwise it should be
replaced).
d. Replace the circulation hose and the hose clamp (79).
e. Fit the seal to the front panel and replace the clamp.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 101 599 35 23-17

9.5 Rear cabinet shell
a. Remove the top

b. Remove the screws which secure the cabinet shell to the upper
cross-member (34)
c. Remove the screw head masking caps and remove the lateral
screws which secure the cabinet shell to the base (35)
d. Detach the wire clamp from the cabinet (36)
e. Remove the rear screws and slide the cabinet shell away from the
base (37)
N.B.: After removing the rear cabinet shell, special care must be taken
when moving the appliance. When the shell is removed, never lay the
appliance on its sides or on its back, since this might damage the
internal structure.
9.5.1 Motor
a. Remove the rear cabinet shell.
b. Detach the wiring connectors.
c. Remove the rear screws which secure the motor and loosen the
front screws (38)
d. Loosen the motor from the supports (39)
e. Remove the front screws and remove the motor.
9.5.2 Electronic speed control system / AC/DC converter

a. Detach the cable connectors
b. Press the two lateral anchor tabs and raise the cover of the casing (40).
c. Remove the electronic board.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 102 599 35 23-17

9.5.3 Thermostat/NTC sensor
b. Detach the drive belt from the pulleys (if necessary).
c. Detach the wiring connectors (fixed-temperature thermostats and NTC
sensors)
d. Remove the thermostat/sensor from the sealing ring (41). Refer to
section 9.2.7 for removal of the adjustable thermostat (42).
Re-assembling the NTC sensors (version with "long" bulb):

The sensor must be replaced with the groove in the connector base facing
downwards (43).
9.5.4 Heating element

b. Detach the drive belt from the pulleys.
c. Detach the wiring connectors (42).
d. Remove the screw which secures the heating element flange.
e. Push the nut on the heating element flange towards the interior of the tub (44).
f. Remove the heating element (45).
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 103 599 35 23-17

9.5.5 Detergent dispenser
8 9

b. Unscrew the clamp and detach the tube from the
detergent dispenser to the tub
c. Detach the steam venting tube from the tub (if present)
d. Extract the detergent drawer (8)
e. Remove the screw which secures the control panel to
the detergent dispenser (9)
f. Remove the screws which secure the detergent
dispenser to the cross-member
g. Remove the solenoid valve(s) (if fitted to the dispenser)
or detach the tube(s) from the dispenser to the solenoid
valve
h. Detach the lever mechanism (46), if present
i. Release the two lateral anchor tabs from the front cross-
member (47a) and, at the same time, push the detergent
dispenser towards the rear
j. Press down the lower anchor tab which secures the
dispenser to the front cross-member (47-b)
k. Lower the washing group and pull the dispenser out
9.5.6 Removing the duct from the dispenser
a. Remove the dispenser 48 49

b. Remove the lever regulation pin (if present) by pressing
the two anchor tabs (48)
c. Release the clamp and the anchor tabs for the duct from
the lower part of the dispenser (49)
From inside the dispenser, the engineer can access:

a. The water intake nozzle, which is removed by lifting from the dispenser
b. The steam venting tube
c. The water distributor
9.5.7 Water distributor

This operation may be performed without
removing the dispenser: a
a. Remove the detergent drawer (8)

b. Release the spring (50a)
c. Release the anchor tab and slide out (50b)
d. Rotate and extract the distributor from c
inside the dispenser
Note: When re-assembling, the specific grease

MUST be applied to the distributor (50c) b 50
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 104 599 35 23-17

9.5.8 Adjusting the dispenser levers
a. Turn the timer knob to the start of a programme

in which water is ducted through the washing
compartment
b. Check that the "1" is aligned with "b" on the
dispenser. If not, lift pointer "2" and rotate the
eccentric camme "3" until "1" is aligned with "b"
(51)
c. Turn the timer knob to a programme in which
water is ducted through the conditioner
compartment and check that the "1" is aligned
with the "d" on the dispenser
51
9.5.9 Damper
a. Remove the rear tub shell
b. Press the locking key and at the same time remove the
pin using pliers (52)
c. Remove the damper from the support
When re-assembling:
Ö Check that the pin is not damaged; if so, replace it.
Ö Check that the anchor tabs protrude correctly.
9.5.10 Drum pulley

a. Remove the rear tub shell
b. Detach the drive belt from the pulley
c. Block the pulley in position and remove the screw
d. Remove the pulley
9.5.11 Pressure chamber

a. Remove the rear cabinet shell
b. Loosen the clamps and detach the pressure switch tubes
from the pressure chamber
c. Remove the screw (if present)
d. Use pliers to widen the spring clip and detach the pressure
chamber from the tub hose
When re-assembling: Check that the pressure chamber is

clean and secure the tubes and clips firmly in their original
positions.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 105 599 35 23-17

9.6 Washing group (Carboran-inox)
a. Remove the fixing ring and detach the bellows seal from the
front panel
b. Remove the rear shell
c. Remove the clamps from the tub suspension springs (53)
d. Detach the various hoses from the tub (dispenser-tub,
steam venting hose, tub-manifold etc.)
e. Remove all the wiring connectors from the components
fastened to the tub (motor, heating element, thermostats)
and, if present, the bulb of the adjustable thermostat
f. Remove the motor to lighten the tub
g. Remove the fixing screws and remove the rear
counterweight (only if featured)
h. Remove the two pins which secure the dampers to the tub
i. Lay the appliance face down (on a sheet of polystyrene or
cardboard to prevent scratching the cabinet)
j. Use a piece of string or wire to detach the tub suspension
springs from the cross-member
k. Remove the tub from the appliance
9.7 Drum and tub shells (Carboran)

a. Remove the drum pulley and the motor
b. Remove the tub from the appliance
c. Remove the screws which secure the two shells together
d. Remove the drum
Re-assembly: It is advisable to replace the sealing ring between the two tub shells whenever the tub is
opened. Connect the hoses to the tub in the correct positions.
9.7.1 Drum shaft bearings

If it is necessary to replace the bearings, the engineer may:
replace the rear tub shell complete with bearings and sealing ring
replace the bearings and the sealing ring only
In the latter case:

a. Remove the tub and the drum from the appliance
b. First remove the external bearing, then the internal bearing with its seal 55
When re-assembling:
In order to prevent damage to the bearing and the seal during re-assembly,
use spacers of the appropriate diameter
Pack the bearings with the specific grease all around the sealing ring (55).
Check that the drum shaft bushing is undamaged, otherwise replace the
drum spider or the drum itself.
9.7.2 Drum spider

a. Remove the screws which secure the spider to the drum
b. Use two narrow chisels to remove the spider from the drum band
When re-assembling:
a. Replace the spider on the drum ensuring that the fixing holes are correctly aligned
b. Insert the spider into the seat in the drum band and, if necessary, rotate it until the holes are correctly
aligned
c. If the same screws are used, clean and apply thread fixing paste
d. Tighten the screws securely
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 106 599 35 23-17

9.7.3 Front counterweight (Carboran tub)
⇒ version with front-mounted fixing screws
a. Remove the tub
b. Replace both the shell and the front counterweight to prevent the possibility of breakage due to
vibrations
⇒ version with fixing screws on the perimeter of the tub
a. Remove the tub
b. Remove the fixing screws
c. Check that the seats of the tub screws are undamaged, otherwise replace the front tub shell
9.7.4 Rear counterweight (Carboran tub)

b. Remove the screws which secure the counterweight
c. Remove the counterweight from the tub
d. Check that the expansion pins of the tub screws are undamaged, otherwise replace the rear shell also
9.8 Components of stainless steel tubs
9.8.1 Tub spider

a. Remove the tub
b. Dismantle the pulley
c. Remove the screws which secure the spider to the tub
d. Remove the nut which secures the tub support band in position
e. Rotate the spider until it exits the fixing holes
f. Push the drum shaft inwards as far as possible
g. Remove the spider from the tub
Alternative method of removing the spider (after removing the tub):
a. Remove the pulley
b. Remove the screws which secure the spider to the tub
c. Push the drum shaft inwards as far as possible
d. Insert a small chisel between one of the lifters and the tub near the
fixing holes, and tap gently with a hammer. If the lifter is secured by
two screws, use two chisels. The chisels should be as thin as
possible in order to avoid deformation of the edge of the tub.
e. Use the chisel(s) to lever the lifter off the tub spider
f. Repeat this procedure for the other lifter and remove the spider.
When re-assembling:
a. Reposition the spider on the drum, ensuring that the holes are
correctly aligned. 55
b. Insert the spider into its seat in the tub band and rotate if necessary
to align the fixing holes.
c. If the same screws are used, clean and apply thread fixing paste
d. Tighten the screws securely.
9.8.2 Drum shaft bearings

If it is necessary to replace the bearings, the engineer may:
replace the tub spider assembly complete with bearings and sealing ring
replace the bearings and the sealing ring only
In the latter case:
a. Remove the spider
b. First remove the external bearing, then the internal bearing with its seal
When re-assembling:
In order to prevent damage to the bearing and the seal during re-assembly, use spacers of the appropriate
diameter
Pack the bearings with the specific grease all around the sealing ring (55).
Check that the drum shaft bushing is undamaged, otherwise replace the drum spider or the drum itself.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 107 599 35 23-17

9.8.3 Tub support band
a. Remove the tub from the appliance
b. Release the retaining spring using a length of steel wire
c. Remove the two nuts which secure the band to the tub (near the
motor)
d. Remove the support band
Re-assembly: First fit the two bolts which secure the band to the tub,
then, using a length of steel wire, re-attach the retaining spring
9.8.4 Drum
a. Remove the tub from the appliance
b. Remove the idle pulley
c. Remove the screw and remove the ring. Remove the front
counterweight and the tub flange with its sealing ring
d. Remove the drum.
9.8.5 Replacing the stainless steel tub

a. Refit the bellows seal to the tub flange.
b. Position the counterweight on the flange, ensuring that the
reference points on the counterweight are in alignment with those
on the bellows seal (59).
c. After replacing the drum, position the flange-counterweight
assembly on the tub, ensuring that the reference point on the
counterweight is aligned with the indent in the support band (60)
d. Fit the retaining ring with the screw in alignment with the welded
seam on the tub (61)
e. Tighten the ring fastening screw while tapping around the perimeter
of the ring to ensure that it is firmly secured.
f. Replace the pulley
g. Replace the tub in the appliance.
Re-connect the hoses to the tub in their original positions.
9.8.6 Rear counterweight

b. Remove the screws which secure the counterweight in position
c. Detach the counterweight from the tub.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 108 599 35 23-17

9.9 Drum lifter
The drum lifter can be removed from the interior for
stainless steel tubs (G10-G11-G12-G13) and the type
G17-G18-G19 Carboran tubs.
For type G20-G21 Carboran tubs, it is necessary
to remove the drum before replacing the lifter.
Removal
a. Insert a screwdriver into the following holes:
⇒ for G13 tubs, into the fourth hole in the lifter
⇒ for G10-G11-G12-G18-G19 tubs, into the third
hole in the lifter
⇒ for G17 tubs, into the second hole of the lifter
b. Bend the drum anchor tabs as shown in the figure
(62)
c. Pull the drum lifter towards the door of the
appliance and detach from the drum (63)
Re-assembly (G10-G11-G12-G18-G19 tubs)

a. Check that the anchor tabs are parallel with the drum band.
b. Insert the new lifter into the drum and push towards the rear of the appliance.
c. Detach the hose connecting the tub to the filter body
d. Tighten the screw through the hole in the tub to secure the lifter to the drum (64)
Re-assembly for G17 tubs (32 cm washing machines)

a. Check that the anchor tabs are parallel to the drum band.
b. Insert the new lifter into the drum and push towards the rear of the appliance.
c. Detach the steam venting hose from the tub.
d. Using a screwdriver through the hole in the tub, bend the anchor tabs so that the drum lifter is firmly
secured (65).
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 109 599 35 23-17

9.10 Access to the pumps/manifolds
Important!
Do not fit the circulation pump in place of the drain pump
and vice versa.
9.10.1 Drain pump (standard version)

To access the drain pump, it is not necessary to remove the rear
cabinet shell. The pump can be accessed from the base.
a. Detach the clamps which secure the filter body to the base
and raise slightly (66)
b. Remove the drain pump
c. Detach the drain hose
d. Detach the wiring connectors
When re-assembling, ensure that the OR seal is fitted to the

pump. To facilitate insertion, lubricate with vaseline or silicone oil.
Check that the pump is correctly housed in its seat in the filter
body.
9.10.2 Drain pump - models with P66 (32cm) cabinet

Access to the pump is from the base of the appliance:
a. Slightly raise the clamp and remove the pump from the base
(67)
b. Detach the drain hose and the hose between the pump and
the tub
c. Detach the wiring connectors
9.10.3 Drain pump - models with RIM and P63 soft BD cabinets
a. Remove the cover

b. Detach the connectors
c. Press down the anchor tab (68c)
d. Turn the pump counter-clockwise (68d)
e. Remove the pump (68e)
68
When re-assembling:
• Insert the pump fully into its seat in the filter body before
rotating it.
• Check that the anchor tab is undamaged. If so, use a
3.5x19 mm screw to secure the pump (69)
69
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 110 599 35 23-17

9.10.4 Drain pump - models with Neat cabinet (Jetsy- IZ)
a. Lay the appliance face-down, remove the screws which secure the filter body and remove the filter from
the base (70)
b. Detach the drain hose from the pump.
c. Press down the two anchor tabs and detach the pump from the filter body (71).
d. Detach the wiring connector.
When re-assembling, ensure that the OR seal is fitted to the pump. To facilitate insertion, lubricate with
vaseline or silicone oil. Check that the pump is correctly housed in its seat in the filter body.
9.10.5 Circulation pump (standard version)

a. Remove the rear shell
b. Disconnect the circulation hose (and, if present, the venting
hose)
c. Lay the appliance face-down and remove the screw which
secures the support to the base.
d. Bend back the two base anchor tabs and remove the pump
(72)
e. Detach the pump from the filter coupling (or from the heat
exchanger)
f. Detach the wiring connector
g. Detach the thermostat bulb (if present)
When re-assembling, ensure that the O-ring is fitted to the filter

body coupling hose (or to the heat exchanger). Lubricate with
vaseline to facilitate insertion.
9.10.6 Circulation pump - “New Jet” version

a. Remove the two screws which secure the pump to the base.
b. Detach the circulation pump assembly from the base.
c. Loosen the clamps and detach the hoses from the pump (73)
d. Detach the cover.
e. Detach the wiring connectors.
f. Remove the circulation pump assembly
9.10.7 Filter/pump assembly - models with Neat cabinet (Jetsy- IZ)

a. Lay the appliance face-down, remove the screws which secure
the filter body (70) and detach the filter from the base.
b. Detach the hoses from the filter body and the pumps.
c. Detach the connectors.
d. Remove the filter/pumps assembly from the base.
9.10.8 Circulation pump - models with Neat cabinet (Jetsy- IZ)

a. Remove the filter/pumps assembly from the base (9.10.7)
b. Remove the screws which secure the circulation pump (74)
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 111 599 35 23-17

9.10.9 Drain filter body (standard version)
b. Lay the appliance face-down
c. Remove the circulation pump (if present)
d. Detach the hoses from the filter body
e. Remove the screws which secure the front shell to the base (75)
f. Raise the base in order to detach the filter body from the front
shell
g. Release the tabs which anchor the filter body to the base (66)
h. Remove the drain pump
i. Remove the filter body
9.10.10 Heat exchanger (certain Jetsystem models only)

b. Detach the circulation pump without detaching the hoses
c. Disconnect the heat exchanger from the filter body
Re-assembly: Ensure that the two seals (O-rings) are correctly positioned on the heat exchanger. Lubricate
with vaseline to facilitate insertion.
9.10.11 Base
b. Remove the pins which secure the dampers to the base
c. Cut the fixing ties and detach the wiring
d. Release the speed control unit casing (if present)
e. Detach the drying condenser (washer-dryers)
f. Lay the appliance face-down
g. Detach the drain hose
h. Remove the lateral screws which secure the front shell to the base (75)
i. Raise the base and remove the filter body
j. Remove the base
After re-assembly, connect the wiring correctly to the base and secure using new wiring ties.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 112 599 35 23-17

9.11 Front cabinet shell
a. Remove the top
b. Remove the control panel
c. Remove the porthole door
d. Detach the bellows seal from the front panel
e. Remove the two screws which secure the door delay device to the
front panel
f. Remove the rear shell
g. Detach the wiring support from the front shell
h. Detach the circulation hose (if present) from the front shell (76)
i. Replace the rear shell, leaving a gap of 1-2 cm in order to remove
the lateral screws which secure the front shell to the base
j. Re-position the rear shell completely and re-tighten the screws
which secure the upper cross-member to the rear cabinet shell
k. Re-tighten the screws which secure the rear shell to the base
l. Lay the appliance on its rear panel, preferably on a sheet of
cardboard to protect the surface
m. Remove the screws which secure the upper cross-member to the
front cabinet shell
n. Lift the cross-member and slide the front cabinet shell from the
base
When re-assembling:
a. Replace the front cabinet shell and check that it is correctly
inserted into the guides in the base
b. Place the appliance in the upright position, taking care not to
damage the structure
c. Replace the screws which secure the upper cross-member to the
front cabinet shell
d. Remove the screws which secure the upper cross-member to the
rear cabinet shell
e. Slide the rear cabinet shell outwards about two centimetres
f. Tighten the lateral screws which secure the front cabinet shell to
the base
g. Remove the rear cabinet shell and replace the internal
components removed in previous steps
h. Replace the rear shell
i. Replace the porthole door, the door delay device, the bellows
seal, the control panel and the top
The following components are attached to the front cabinet shell:
the support brackets for the feet (using two screws)

the drain filter access panel
on P63 and NEAT models, the lower plinth
It is not necessary to remove the cabinet shell in order to access these components.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 113 599 35 23-17

9.12 Access to specific washer-dryer components
9.12.1 Bellows seal and drying duct

b. Remove the screw which secures the duct to the tank (80)
c. Open the porthole door, remove the screw which secures the
duct to the cabinet, detach the duct from the heating element
casing and pull the seal downwards (81)
d. Detach the seal from the front panel
e. Detach the circulation hose from the seal (Jetsystem models
only) (78)
f. Remove the wire clamp which secures the seal to the duct and
remove the seal (82)
At this point, the duct can be accessed. To access the seal,
proceed as follows:
g. Remove the seal and the ring by pulling downwards
Re-assembly
a. Use soap and water to lubricate the seal seat where it comes
into contact with the flange and the metal ring
b. Replace the seal, ensuring that the reference mark on the seal
is aligned with the hole for the screw which secures the duct to
the front panel (83)
c. Re-connect the circulation hose (if featured) with the hose
clamp (79)
d. When replacing the wire hose clamp, ensure that it is correctly
positioned in the groove in the seal, then proceed as shown in
the figure (84)
e. Lubricate the seal with soap and water to facilitate insertion of
the duct into the heating element casing.
f. Use pliers to re-close the two anchor tabs and tighten the
screw (85)
g. Attach the seal to the front panel
h. Re-tighten the screw which secures the duct to the cabinet
i. Replace the ring which secures the duct to the cabinet using
pliers to close in position
After fitting a new bellows seal, lubricate the external surface
(which comes into contact with the porthole door) with
silicone oil. This will ensure that the porthole door does not
stick to the seal during the first few drying cycles.
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 114 599 35 23-17

9.12.2 Rear cabinet shell
a. Remove the top
b. Remove the screws which secure the shell to the base and to
the control panel support
c. Remove the screw which secures the fan to the shell (86)
9.12.3 Motor-Fan assembly

b. Remove the screw which secures the fan to the control panel support
(87)
c. Detach the fan from the heating element casing:
Ö Standard version: if present, remove the seal retaining clamp (88)
and fold back the seal on the coupling between the fan and the
heating elements (89)
Ö High Performance version: remove the screw from the heating
element casing (90)
d. Detach the fan from the drying condenser and from the cross-
member (91)
e. Detach the wiring connector from the motor and remove the fan
assembly
Re-assembly:
For the "High Performance" version, replace the sealing ring (OR)
between the heating element casing and the fan; replace the fan
assembly on the condenser, attaching to the cross-member; close the
anchor tabs using pliers (92), then fully tighten the screw.
9.12.4 Motor / Fan

a. Remove the fan assembly
b. Detach the drive belt from the pulleys
c. Remove the three screws and separate the motor from the fan (93)
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 115 599 35 23-17

9.12.5 Drying heater casing
b. Detach the connectors from the heating elements and from the thermostats
c. Detach the fan from the casing (9.12.3)
d. Remove the screws which secure the casing to the duct and the two screws which secure it to the
cross-member
e. Remove the casing
When re-assembling: Use pliers to close the two anchor tabs and tighten the screw (85)
9.12.6 Drying heaters

b. Remove the hose connecting the condenser to the dispenser
coupling
c. Detach the connectors
d. Remove the screws which secure the heating element to the casing
e. Remove the heating element
When re-assembling: When inserting the heating element, ensure that

it is correctly positioned in the support inside the casing.
9.12.7 Drying and safety thermostats

a. Remove the heating element casing from the appliance
b. Remove the screws which secure the thermostat to the casing and
remove the thermostat
9.12.8 Temperature sensor / Safety thermostat

b. Detach the connectors
c. Remove the screws which secure the component to the casing and
remove the thermostat/sensor (95)
9.12.9 Drying condenser

b. Lift the fan and detach from the condenser (91)
c. Detach the upper hoses from the condenser
d. Detach the NTC sensor connector (if present)
e. Detach the condenser from the base
f. Loosen the clamp and detach the hose which connects the
condenser to the tub (96)
9.12.10 NTC sensor for control of drying times (models with electronic control)
b. Detach the wiring connector
c. Remove the temperature sensor from the hose between the tub and
the condenser or from the seal
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 116 599 35 23-17

10 TOOLS AND MATERIALS
10.1 Standard tools
1. Set of standard flat-head screwdrivers (small,

medium, large)
2. Set of cross-head ("Phillips") screwdrivers
3. Set of socket screws (7, 8, 10, 13, 15, 17mm)

4. Insulated scissors.
5. Allen keys (5-6 mm)
6. A battery-operated power screwdriver may also
be used.
7. “Torx” screwdriver(T30-T50)
8. “Torx” T20H insert (to unscrew "Torx" T20
screws with central pin, also available as a tool
under part number 5024880100/8).
9. Adjustable wrench
10. Standard pliers
11. Narrow-tipper pliers (curved)
12. Narrow-tipped pliers (straight)
13. Cutter
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 117 599 35 23-17

14. Hammer (300 g approx.)
15. Plastic or rubber-head hammer
16. Two narrow-tipped chisels (mm 200x8)
17. Steel wire

18. "L"-shaped lever (used to detach the support
band from stainless steel tubs)
When replacing the bearings, use spacers of the

appropriate diameter
10.2 Materials
Ö soap and water

Ö silicone oil
Ö vaseline
Ö thread-anchoring liquid for screws
Ö grease for drum shaft seal (part number 5026 24 16-00/6)
Ö grease for detergent dispenser distributor (part number 5022 18 11-00/8)
Ö plastic wiring ties
SOI/DT 2002-05 eb 118 599 35 23-17

WASHING
2520-2530
SERVICE BULLETIN
MODIFICATION OF ANCHORS FOR G11/G19/G12 (42-46 litres)
As from serial no. 901..., the system used to anchor the lifters on G11/G19 drums (capacity 42 litres) and
G12 (capacity 46 litres), fitted to a large number of washing machine/washer dryers models in the P6000
range with stainless steel (G11/G12) and carboran (G19) tubs.
The new system of anchoring the lifters limits possible movement and thus reduces the possibility of
detachment from the drum.
PART NOS.
Pos. Description Old part no. New part no.
262 Lifter 124 00 69-11/0 --------------------

262 Lifter + screw -------------------- 5025 22 71-00/7
PART NOS. DRUM COMPLETE (Pos. 250)

Part no. before New part no. Type Spin Previous part nos. replaced by
modification (rpm) drum before the modification
124 02 90-02/1 124 02 90-08/8 G11/G19 (42 l) 400 --------
124 02 90-33/6 124 02 90-38/5 G11/G19 (42 l) 500-600 124 02 90-31/0
124 02 90-51/8 124 02 90-58/3 G11/G19 (42 l) 1000-1200 --------
124 02 90-71/6 124 02 90-78/1 G12 (46 l) 1000-1200 --------
124 02 91-42/5 124 02 91-47/4 G11/G19 (42 l) 1400-1500 124 02 91-40/9
124 02 91-52/4 124 02 91-57/3 G12 (46 l) 1400-1500 124 02 91-50/8
124 02 91-63/1 124 02 91-67/2 G11/G19 (42 l) 1000 124 02 91-60/7
124 63 26-30/8 124 63 26-33/2 G11/G19 (42 l) 1200 --------
124 63 26-40/7 124 63 26-43/1 G12 (46 l) 1200 --------
124 63 26-80/3 124 63 26-81/1 G12 (46 l) 650-850 124 02 90-63/3 124 02 90-66/6
124 63 26-90/2 124 63 26-91/0 G11/G19 (42 l) 650-850 124 02 09-02/7 124 02 90-46/8
INTERCHANGEABILITY
The modified drum is perfectly interchangeable with the one before the modification.
If the lifter is to be replaced, use the kit (lifter + stainless steel screw) code 5025 22 71-00/7, which can be
fitted to the old and new drums alike.
EN Publication no. 599 33 73-59/5 Service 99-01-25 - ITZ

1/2
FITTING THE NEW DRUM LIFTER
Removal:
a. Insert a screwdriver into the fourth hole in the lifter and

bend back the anchor tabs as shown in the figure.
b. Pull the lifter outwards (towards the door) and detach from
the drum.
Replacement:
a. Check that the anchor tabs are parallel to the drum

casing.
b. Insert the new lifter into the drum and push towards the
rear of the appliance.
c. Disconnect the tube between the tub and the filter body.
d. Tighten the screw (through the hole in the tub) to secure

the lifter to the drum.
2/2
WASHING
2520 - 2530
SERVICE BULLETIN
GREASE FOR DRUM SHAFT SEAL
Be please informed that a new tub containing 25 g. of grease for the drum shaft seal is now available with
the spare part no. 5026 24 16-00/6.
This special grease must be used whenever replacing the seal (e.g. when replacing the bearings) on
washing machines and washer/dryers.
Fill entirely with grease the inside of the seal!
EN Publication No. 599 34 28-22 Service 00-06-01 - ITZ
TSE-P eb 06/00 1/1 599 34 28-22

WASHING
2520
SERVICE BULLETIN
UNDERCOUNTER KIT FOR RIM WM PRODUCED IN PORCIA AND ALCALÁ
The undercounter kits for WM with RIM cabinet, produced in Porcia (Italy) and Alcalà (Spain) are available at
the Spare Parts Warehouse in Maniago.
RIM PORCIA
Undercounter Kit part no. 5027 96 47-00/7
RIM ALCALA’
Undercounte Kit part no. 5027 96 48-00/5
EN Publication no. 599 36 17-24 Spares Operations Italy 04-04-27
2004-04 dmm 1/1 599361724

SERVICE MANUAL
WASHING
Washing machines with

EWM 1000 electronic
 ELECTROLUX ZANUSSI S.p.A. control system:
Spares Operations Italy Publication no.
Corso Lino Zanussi, 30
Technical and functional
I - 33080 PORCIA /PN (ITALY) 599 37 30-10
characteristics
Fax +39 0434 394096 EN
Version with
Horizontal and Vertical
Edition: 2005-21-09 pushbuttons
Production:
ZP - Porcia (IT)
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 1 599 37 30-10

SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 2 599 37 30-10
CONTENTS
1 Purpose of this manual .............................................................................................................................. 5

2 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS............................................................................................................... 6
3 CONTROL PANEL..................................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 Delta3 styling ...................................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Sigma styling....................................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 AEG styling ......................................................................................................................................... 7
3.4 Configuration of control panel............................................................................................................. 8
3.4.1 Programme selector (S1) ........................................................................................................... 8
3.4.2 Secondary selector (S2) .............................................................................................................. 8
3.5 Pushbuttons and LEDs ....................................................................................................................... 9
3.5.1 Wash phase LEDs..................................................................................................................... 10
4 WASHING PROGRAMMES AND OPTIONS .......................................................................................... 11
4.1 Programmes ..................................................................................................................................... 11
4.2 Options.............................................................................................................................................. 12
4.2.1 Compatibility between Options.................................................................................................. 13
4.3 Description of options ....................................................................................................................... 14
4.3.1 Temperature adjustment ........................................................................................................... 15
4.3.2 Modifying the spin speed........................................................................................................... 16
4.3.3 Buzzer........................................................................................................................................ 17
4.4 Modification of rinses according to the options selected .................................................................. 17
5 WASHING PROGRAMMES .................................................................................................................... 18
5.1 Base programmes for Cotton / Linen: cold-30-40-50-60-90° (without options)................................ 18
5.2 Cotton / Linen Cycles: 90 Eco, 60 - 40/50 “energy label” (without options) ..................................... 19
5.3 Base programmes for Synthetics: cold - 30- 40 – 50 - 60° (without options) ................................... 20
5.4 Wool programmes: cold - 30° - 40° ................................................................................................ 20
5.5 Programmes for Delicate fabrics: cold – 30° - 40° (without options)................................................ 21
5.6 Hand-wash programmes: cold - 30° - 40° ........................................................................................ 21
5.7 JEANS programmes ......................................................................................................................... 22
5.8 SHOES programmes ........................................................................................................................ 22
5.9 DUVET programmes ........................................................................................................................ 23
5.10 MINI PROGRAMME...................................................................................................................... 23
5.11 Drum movements at low speed and during spin........................................................................... 24
5.11.1 D55 Delicate movement ............................................................................................................ 24
5.11.2 N55 Normal movement.............................................................................................................. 24
5.11.3 E55 Vigorous movement ........................................................................................................... 24
5.11.4 E55 Vigorous movement ........................................................................................................... 24
5.11.5 PWL_1 (wool) Delicate movement ............................................................................................ 24
5.11.6 PWL_4 (hand wash) Delicate movement .................................................................................. 24
5.11.7 Cotton/Linen, Synthetics – C0 Intermediate Synthetics Prewash Spin..................................... 25
5.11.8 C1 Cotton/Linen Wash Spin ...................................................................................................... 25
5.11.9 C2 Cotton/Linen Intermediate Spin ........................................................................................... 25
5.11.10 COT_CF Cotton/Linen Final Spin .......................................................................................... 25
5.11.11 SYN_CF Synthetics Intermediate and Final Spin.................................................................. 25
5.11.12 DEL_ CF Delicates Final Spin ............................................................................................... 26
5.11.13 WOOL_CF Hand Wash and Wool Final Spin ........................................................................ 26
5.11.14 “Spin” Programme.................................................................................................................. 26
5.11.15 Easy-iron Impulse Cycle ........................................................................................................ 26
5.11.16 Intermediate Spin for Cotton/Linen with Super-rinse option .................................................. 26
5.11.17 Wash and intermediate spin for DUVET................................................................................ 27
5.11.18 Final spin for DUVET ............................................................................................................. 27
5.12 Control of water level in tub........................................................................................................... 28
5.12.1 Water fills for models with G20 tub (47 litres drum volume)...................................................... 28
5.12.2 Water fills for models with G19 tub (42 litres drum volume)...................................................... 29
5.13 Profile of COTTON 60 Economy / Energy label cycle .................................................................. 30
5.14 Profiles of COTTON 60° cycles .................................................................................................... 30
6 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS.......................................................................................................... 31
6.1 Control system memory.................................................................................................................... 31
6.1.1 General structure of the memory system .................................................................................. 31
6.1.2 ROM .......................................................................................................................................... 31
6.1.3 RAM........................................................................................................................................... 31
6.1.4 EEPROM ................................................................................................................................... 32
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 3 599 37 30-10

6.2 Door interlock.................................................................................................................................... 33
6.3 Voltmetric interlock with PTC............................................................................................................ 33
6.3.1 Operating principle .................................................................................................................... 33
6.3.2 “Door locked” pilot lamp............................................................................................................. 33
6.4 Instantaneous door interlock............................................................................................................. 34
6.4.2 Conditions necessary for door release...................................................................................... 34
6.4.3 Automatic release device .......................................................................................................... 34
6.4.4 “Door locked” pilot lamp............................................................................................................. 34
6.5 Control pressure switch for water level in the tub............................................................................. 35
6.5.1 Pressure switch settings............................................................................................................ 35
6.5.2 Water fill without wash load ....................................................................................................... 35
6.6 Water fill system ............................................................................................................................... 36
6.6.1 Calculation of flow rate .............................................................................................................. 36
6.7 Detergent dispenser ......................................................................................................................... 37
6.8 “Short” detergent dispenser .............................................................................................................. 37
6.9 “Long” detergent dispenser............................................................................................................... 39
6.10 Drain pump.................................................................................................................................... 41
6.11 Anti-flooding device....................................................................................................................... 41
6.12 Heating .......................................................................................................................................... 42
6.13 Temperature sensor...................................................................................................................... 42
6.14 Motor ............................................................................................................................................. 43
6.15 Power supply to motor .................................................................................................................. 43
6.16 Anti-foam control system............................................................................................................... 43
6.17 “FUCS” (Fast Unbalance Control System).................................................................................... 44
6.17.1 Examples of operation of the unbalancing control function....................................................... 44
7 DEMO MODE........................................................................................................................................... 46
7.1 Exiting DEMO mode ......................................................................................................................... 46
8 DIAGNOSTICS SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................ 46
8.1 Access to diagnostics mode ............................................................................................................. 46
8.2 Exiting diagnostics mode .................................................................................................................. 46
8.3 Diagnostics phases........................................................................................................................... 47
9 ALARMS .................................................................................................................................................. 48
9.1 User alarm display ............................................................................................................................ 48
9.1.1 Operation of the alarm system during normal use .................................................................... 48
9.1.2 Alarms displayed during normal operation ................................................................................ 48
9.2 Reading the alarm codes.................................................................................................................. 49
9.2.1 Displaying the alarm .................................................................................................................. 49
9.2.2 Examples of alarm displays....................................................................................................... 49
9.2.3 Operation of alarms during diagnostics..................................................................................... 49
9.3 Rapid reading of alarm codes........................................................................................................... 50
9.4 Cancelling the last alarm .................................................................................................................. 50
9.5 Table of alarm codes ........................................................................................................................ 51
10 BASIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS............................................................................................................... 53
10.1 Version with instantaneous-aperture interlock ............................................................................. 53
10.2 Version with PTC interlock ............................................................................................................ 54
10.3 Key to circuit diagram.................................................................................................................... 55
11 ACCESS TO THE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM...................................................................... 56
11.1.1 Top panel................................................................................................................................... 56
11.1.2 Control panel ............................................................................................................................. 56
11.1.3 Electronic control board............................................................................................................. 57
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 4 599 37 30-10

1 Purpose of this manual
The purpose of this manual is to provide service engineers who are already familiar with the repair
procedures for traditional washing machines with information regarding appliances fitted with the EWM 1000
electronic control system and produced in Porcia (Italy).
The following are described:
• general characteristics
• control panel and washing programmes
• technical and functional characteristics
• access to the electronic control system
For detailed information concerning diagnostics and alarms, refer to the following manual:
“EWM1000 electronic control system: guide to diagnostics procedures”.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 5 599 37 30-10

2 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
The EWM 1000 electronic control system consists of
a single PCB, which incorporates the power, control
and display functions.
The PCB is contained in a protective casing located
behind the control panel support. Two basic versions
of the PCB are produced: one with horizontal
pushbuttons and one with vertical pushbuttons.
The EWM 1000 electronic control system may be fitted to the following appliances:
♦ front-loading washing machines manufactured in Spain (Alcalà de Henares) (ESA)

♦ front-loading washing machines manufactured in Germany (Nürnberg) (DGN)
♦ top-loading washing machines manufactured in France (Revin) (FFH)
♦ front-loading washing machines manufactured in Italy (Porcia) (ZP)
Versions with
horizontal pushbuttons
Version with vertical

pushbuttons
Number of buttons max. 5 (4 options + start/pause)

max. 11 for version with horizontal pushbuttons
Number of LEDs
max. 15 for version with vertical pushbuttons
Programme selector 16 positions with main switch (incorporated in the PCB)
Secondary selector 6 positions for horizontal version only (incorporated in the PCB)
Buzzer incorporated in the PCB
Serial port DAAS-EAP communications protocol up to 38400 baud
220/240V
Power supply
50/60 Hz (configurable)
traditional
Type of washing
with “eco-ball” sphere
Rinsing system Traditional
Motor Commutator motor
Spin speed 600 - 1400 rpm
Anti-unbalancing
FUCS
system
Water fill 1 solenoid valve with 1 inlet - 2 outlets
3 compartments: prewash/stains, wash, conditioners
Detergent drawer
4 compartments: prewash/stains, wash, conditioners, bleach
two-level pressure switch: 1st level and anti-boiling safety level (the other
Control of water level in levels refer to fixed-time fills)
the tub possibility of three-level pressure switch: 1st level, anti-boiling and anti-
flooding safety levels
Traditional (with PTC)
Door safety device
Instantaneous
Power of heating
up to 1950W
element
Temperature control NTC sensor
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 6 599 37 30-10

3 CONTROL PANEL
3.1 Delta3 styling

• maximum 5 pushbuttons
• 16-position programme selector
• version with 6-position secondary selector
3.2 Sigma styling

• version with 6-position secondary selector
3.3 AEG styling

SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 7 599 37 30-10

3.4 Configuration of control panel
The washing programmes, the functions of the selector knob and the various pushbuttons vary
according to the model, since these are determined by the configuration of the appliance.
3.4.1 Programme selector (S1)

The selector features 16 positions and incorporates the ON/OFF switch.
The various positions of the selector may be configured to perform
different washing programmes; in the first position, the appliance is
switched off and the current programme is cancelled. For each
programme, the compatible options and other parameters are defined.
• Programme configuration
The table below lists the parameters that can be used to define the washing programmes.
Cotton/linen, Synthetic fabrics, Delicates, Wool, Hand-wash,

Types of fabric
Shoes, Jeans, Duvet
Special programmes Soak, Rinses, Spin, Drain, Conditioner
Normal, Maximum: the initial temperature is the maximum that
Temperature
can be selected for a specific washing programme
Spin Normal, Minimum, Maximum
Bleach, Economy (energy label), Daily, Stains, Short, Very short,
Options (Normal / Possible) Reduced spin speed, Night-time cycle, Half-load, Easy-Iron,
Rinse Hold, Extra rinse, Pre-wash
Programme phases Pre-wash, Wash, Rinses, Spin, Economy, Delayed start
3.4.2 Secondary selector (S2)
Certain models may also feature a 6-position secondary selector. The

function of this selector is defined during configuration of the
appliance
• Temperature selector: each position corresponds to a

temperature or to the cold wash cycle.
• Spin speed selector: at each position, it is possible to select a

spin speed that is compatible with the programme. In the final
positions, the following options can also be configured: No Spin,
Rinse Hold, Night cycle.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 8 599 37 30-10

3.5 Pushbuttons and LEDs
The functions of each button are defined by the configuration of the appliance.
Horizontal
Description Vertical pushbuttons
pushbuttons
• Button 1: This pushbutton is connected to two LEDs

(11 – 12) and, if used, may be configured for selection
of one or two options; in the latter case, the two options
cannot be selected at the same time.
• Buttons 2, 3, 4: These buttons are connected to

LEDs 21, 31 and 41 respectively and, if used, each
can be configured for a single option.
• Button 5:
ª Horizontal pushbuttons
This button can be configured in two ways:
→ as a single option: in this case, the button is
connected to LED 51.
ª as a multi-selection button: in this case, the button
is connected to LEDs 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, and can be
used to select the spin speed and the delayed-start
time. However, one of the LEDs must be configured
as an END OF CYCLE signal; therefore not all the
LEDs are used by this button.
• Vertical pushbuttons
ª as a multi-selection button: the button is connected
to LEDs 51, 52, 53, 54 and can be used to select the
spin speed and the delayed-start time.
• Combination of buttons: The appliance can be configured to utilize a combination of two buttons
(which must be pressed simultaneously for 5 seconds) to select the super-rinse cycle or to deactivate
the buzzer (if featured). A similar procedure is used to access the diagnostics procedure or to select
DEMO mode.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 9 599 37 30-10

3.5.1 Wash phase LEDs
Horizontal
Description Vertical pushbuttons
pushbuttons
• Horizontal pushbuttons
LEDs 61-65 can be used as wash phase
indicators, in which case they are not
associated with button 5.
These, too, can be configured; the END OF CYCLE
indicator is featured on all models.
• Vertical pushbuttons
LEDs 61-65 can be used as wash phase indicators.
These, too, can be configured; the END OF CYCLE
indicator is featured on all models.
LED 66 indicates the status of the door.
Indications
Lights during selection mode if the programme includes the pre-wash phase,
Pre-wash
and during the execution of the pre-wash
Lights during selection mode if the programme includes the wash phase, and
Wash
during the execution of the wash
Lights during selection mode if the programme includes the pre-wash or wash
Pre-wash/Wash
phases, and during the execution of these phases
Lights during selection mode if the programme includes rinse phases, and during
Rinses
the execution of the rinses
Lights during selection mode if the programme includes the spin phase, and
Spin
during the execution of the spin
Lights during selection mode if the programme includes the drain phase, and
Drain
during the execution of the drain
Extra rinse Lights when this option has been memorized (if included in the cycle)
Lights if the programme includes the rinse-hold option and at the end of the
Rinse-hold
cycle, when the appliance stops with water in the tub
Current cycle Lights during execution of the cycle
Lights when the programme has been completed; also used to display alarm
End of cycle
conditions
ON/OFF Lights when the appliance is switched on
Lights when the door interlock prevents opening of the door, and switches off
when the door can be opened. Flashes when the interlock is about to release the
Door locked
door (may be seen if PTC devices are used, as these require one or two minutes
before releasing the interlock)
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 10 599 37 30-10

4 WASHING PROGRAMMES AND OPTIONS
4.1 Programmes
The washing programmes can be configured. The basic programmes are listed in the table below.
Programme Temperature (°C) Number of rinses Final spin (rpm)

90 82
90E 67
60 60
60E 54 (*)
450/650/850/1000/1200/
Cotton 50 50 3
1300/1400
50/40E 43 (*)
40 40
30 30
cold 20
60 60
60/50E 42 (*)
Synthetic 50 50
3 Max. 900
fabrics 40 42
30 30
cold 20
Mini 30 30
3 Max. 900
Programme cold 20
40 40
Delicates 30 30 3 450/700
cold 20
40 38
Wool
30 33 3 Max. 1000
Hand-wash
cold 20
40 40
Shoes 30 30 3 Max. 1000
cold 20
60 60
50 50
450/650/850/1000/1200/
Jeans 40 40 5
1300/1400
30 30
cold 20
Soak 30/20 ---- ----

Rinses ---- 3 Max. 1400
Conditioner ---- 1 Max. 1400
Drain ---- ---- ----
Spin ---- ---- Max. 1400
The data are indicative.
(*) “energy label” programmes
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 11 599 37 30-10

4.2 Options
The table below lists the possible options for the washing programmes, the compatibility of the various
options and with the cycle, and when it is possible to select or modify the options.
The options can be selected in three ways:
using the programme selector: in this case, the options are configured as special programmes.
using the secondary selector (temperature or spin speed)
using the pushbuttons
OPTIONS
Reduced spin speed

Short (Daily)
Super-rinse
Night cycle
Rinse-hold
Very short
Hygienize
Easy-iron
Economy
Pre-wash
Half-load
No spin
Bleach
Stains
90°C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Cotton
30°C X X X X X X X X X X X X
cold X X X X X X X X X X X X
60°C X X X X X X X X X X X X X
50°C X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Synthetic fabrics 40°C X X X X X X X X X X X X
30°C X X X X X X X X X X X
Compatibility with PROGRAMMES
cold X X X X X X X X X X X
30°C X X X X X
Mini Programme
cold X X X X X
40°C X X X X X X X X
Delicates
30°C X X X X X X X X
Mixed
cold X X X X X X X X
40°C X X X X X
Wool /
30°C X X X X X
Hand-wash
cold X X X X X
40°C X X X X X X
Shoes 30°C X X X X X X
cold X X X X X X
60°C X X X X X X
50°C X X X X X X
Jeans 40°C X X X X X X
30°C X X X X X X
cold X X X X X X
Soak
Rinses X X X X X X X
Conditioner X X X X X X
Drain
Spin X
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 12 599 37 30-10

4.2.1 Compatibility between Options
OPTIONS
Reduced spin speed

Short (Daily)
Super-rinse
Night cycle
Rinse-hold
Very short
Hygienize
Easy-iron
Economy
Pre-wash
Half-load
No spin
Bleach
Stains
Rinse-hold X X X X X X X X X X X X
Night cycle X X X X X X X X X X
Compatibility with OPTIONS
Pre-wash X X X X X X X X X X
Stains X X X X X X X X X X
Very short X X X X X X X X X X X
Short (daily) X X X X X X X X X X X
Economy X X X X X X X X X X X
Super-rinse X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Bleach X X X X X X X X X X
Half-load X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Easy-iron X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Reduced spin speed X X X X X X X X X X
No spin X X X X X X X X X X X
Hygienize X X X X X X X X X X
Selection X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Phases in
Pre-wash X X X X X X X X X X X X X
which selection
or modification Wash X X X X X X X X X X X X
are possible Rinses X X X

Spin X X
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 13 599 37 30-10

4.3 Description of options
• Night cycle
→ Eliminates all spin phases and adds three rinses in COTTON cycles and two rinses in SYNTHETICS
cycles.
→ Stops the appliance with water in the tub before the final rinse.
→ Switches off the buzzer (if configured).
→ To drain the water, reset the programme and then select a drain or spin cycle.
• Pre-wash
→ Adds a pre-wash phase at the start of the cycle with water heating to 30°C (or cold, if selected).
→ In COTTON and SYNTHETICS cycles, performs a short spin before passing to the washing phase.
→ This option cannot be selected for WOOL and HAND-WASH cycles.
• Stains
→ Adds a 5-minute motor movement phase after heating to 40°C.
→ Ducts water to the pre-wash/stains compartment in order to introduce the special stain-removal product.
→ This option cannot be selected for DELICATES, WOOL and HAND-WASH cycles.
• Short (Daily)
→ Modifies the structure of the washes in the COTTON and SYNTHETICS programmes in order to obtain
good washing performance with a very short cycle (optimization for small loads).
• Very short
→ Modifies the structure of the COTTON, SYNTHETICS and DELICATES programmes in order to obtain
short washing times (optimization for small or lightly-soiled loads).
→ Reduces the number of rinse cycles (one less).
→ Increases the water level in the remaining two rinse cycles.
• Economy / Energy label

→ Modifies the structure of the COTTON 40-60 and SYNTHETICS 50/60 programmes in order to reduce
energy consumption.
→ Reduces the washing temperature.
→ Increases the duration of the wash phase.
• Super-rinse
→ Adds two rinses in the COTTON, SYNTHETICS and DELICATES cycles.
→ Eliminates the intermediate spin cycles, with the exception of the final rinse, which is reduced to 450
rpm.
• Bleach
→ Ducts water through the bleach compartment at the beginning of the first rinse in COTTON cycles.
• Half-load
→ Eliminates one rinse in COTTON programmes.
• Easy-Iron
→ In COTTON programmes:
- adds three rinse cycles
- eliminates the intermediate spin cycles
- performs an impulse spin phase
- adds an “untangling” phase after the spin cycle
→ In SYNTHETICS cycles:
- reduces the heating temperature in 50/60° cycles to 40°C
- increases the washing time
- prolongs the cooling phase at the end of the washing phase
- adds one rinse
- adds an “untangling” phase after the impulse spin cycle
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 14 599 37 30-10

• Rinse-hold
→ Stops the appliance with water in the tub before the final spin cycle.
→ To drain the water, reset the programme and then select a drain or spin cycle.
• Reduced spin speed

→ Reduces the speed of all spins as shown in the table.
Maximum spin speed (rpm) 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1550
Reduction for COTTON (rpm) 450 450 450 450 500 550 600 650 700 750
Reduction for ALL OTHER CYCLES (rpm) 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450
• Delayed-start time
→ Adds a pause before the start of the programme. The delay time is displayed on the corresponding
LEDs.
→ To start the cycle immediately after selecting a delayed start:
- press START/PAUSE, cancel the delay time by pressing the appropriate button, then press
START/PAUSE again.
Examples of delay time buttons
4.3.1 Temperature adjustment
→ Used to select the washing temperature compatibly with the

limit temperature for the cycle.
→ Can be used during the cycle selection phase: the temperature can
be modified only if the heating phase has not started (in pause
mode).
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 15 599 37 30-10

4.3.2 Modifying the spin speed
→ Reduces the speed of all spin cycles as shown in the table.
→ The last position can be used for NO SPIN, RINSE-HOLD or NIGHT-TIME CYCLE.
→ If the NO-SPIN option is selected, two rinses are added in the COTTON cycle, and one in the
SYNTHETICS cycle.
The tables below list examples of modification of the spin speed.
6-position selector with NO SPIN and RINSE-HOLD (rpm)

1 - Max. spin speed 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1600
2 550 600 700 800 900 900 900 900 900 1100
3 500 500 600 700 700 700 700 700 700 900
4 450 450 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rinse- Rinse- Rinse- Rinse- Rinse- Rinse- Rinse- Rinse- Rinse- Rinse-
6 – Last position hold hold hold hold hold hold hold hold hold hold
6-position selector with NO SPIN (rpm)

1 - Max. spin speed 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1600
2 550 600 700 800 900 900 900 1100 1200 1200
3 500 500 600 700 700 700 700 900 900 900
4 450 450 500 600 600 600 600 700 700 700
5 400 400 400 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
6 – Last position 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Button with 5 LEDs

1 - Max. spin speed 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1600
2 550 600 700 800 900 900 900 900 900 1100
3 500 500 600 700 700 700 700 700 700 900
4 450 450 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or
5 – Last position Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold
Button with 4 LEDs

1 - Max. spin speed 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400
2 500 600 700 700 700 700 900 900 900
3 400 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or No spin or
4 – Last position Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold Rinse-hold
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 16 599 37 30-10

4.3.3 Buzzer
The buzzer (if featured) is incorporated in the PCB, but functions only if the appropriate configuration code is
entered.
• Exclude buzzer
The buzzer can be deactivated by pressing a combination of two buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds.
This option depends on the configuration; as a result, the buttons may vary according to the model.
If the buzzer is deactivated, the appliance will emit no acoustic signal during selection or at the end of the
cycle; however, the alarm signalling system remains operative.
4.4 Modification of rinses according to the options selected

Number of rinses for the options
(Night cycle
Super-rinse
Super-rinse
Night cycle
Easy-iron
Easy-iron
No spin)
No spin
Normal
and
Very short 2 4 5 7
Daily 3 5 6 8
COTTON Eco 3 5 6 8
Eco 2 4 5 7
Normal 3 5 6 8
PROGRAMMES
Very short 2 4 3 5
SYNTHETIC Daily 3 5 4 6
FABRICS Eco 3 5 4 6
Normal 3 5 4 6
Very short 2 4 2 4
DELICATES
Normal 3 5 3 5
WOOL Normal 3 3 3 3
HAND-WASH Normal 3 3 3 3
SILK Normal 3 3 3 3
JEANS Normal 5 7 8 10
The half-load option reduces of 1 rinse all cotton programmes except the Very short (Quick)
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 17 599 37 30-10

5 WASHING PROGRAMMES
5.1 Base programmes for Cotton / Linen: cold-30-40-50-60-90° (without options)

Detergent
Phase N. Function Control Movement Notes
dispenser
90 60 40 30 *
0 Drain Time No Movement VAE + 2”+ 6” pause
1 Water fill P1+Time PW ----- P1 + QPW1 (*)
2 Cold wash Time D55 Refill: P1+ 5 min.
Prewash
3 Water fill Time PW ----- Qpw2(*)

4 Heating Temperature 30° 20°
D55
5 Maintenance Time 10 min.
6 Drain Time ----- VAE +20”
7 Spin Time C0 4,5 min.
8 Drain Time ----- 20”
9 Water fill P1+Time W P1+Qhl(*)
Water fill N55 Refill P1+Qw(*)
10 Cold wash
Time 10’
11 Heating Temperature 87°/84 60° 40° 30° 20°
Temperature 60 40 30 20
12 Maintenance
Time 4 min. 10 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min.
87°/84
Wash
13 Heating Temperature E55 60° 40° 30°

°
14
14 Maintenance Time 20 min. 35 min. 35 min. 35 min.
min.
15 Cooling Time ----- Qc
16 Maintenance Time D55 2 min.
17 Drain Time ------- VAE+14”
18 Spin Movement C1 5 min.
19 Drain Time ----- 20”
20 Water fill P1+Time PW No Movement P1+Qfr 1(*)
21 Maintenance Time N55 5 min.
rinse
1st
22 Drain Level ----- AB_LEV

24 Drain Time ----- 20”
25 Water fill P1+Time W N55 P1+Qn2(*)
26 Maintenance Time 5 Min.
rinse
2nd

29 Drain Time ----- 20”
30 Water fill P1+Time SF ------- P1+Q3rd(*)
31 Maintenance Time 30”
Last rinse
(softener)
32 Water fill P1+Time SF N55 Qn3(*)

34 Drain Level ----- AB_LEV+14”
35 Spin Movement CF_COT 9 min.
The data are indicative
Notes:
P1 time needed to 1st level water fill

(*) time water fills are changeable and calculated by the electronic on the basis of the delivery rate
(see specific table)
T time needed to heat the water at the set temperature
” seconds
‘ minutes
VAE time needed to drain the water till “empty” position of anti- boiling (safety heater) pressure
switch
Movement: in this column are described the drum movements at low speed and during spin. (See
paragraph “drum movements”)
The times of drain phases with spin cycle are indicative and do not take into consideration the
intervention of antiunbalance and antifoam protections.
Detergent
dispenser: in this column is indicated the dispenser that is filled with water
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 18 599 37 30-10

5.2 Cotton / Linen Cycles: 90 Eco, 60 - 40/50 “energy label” (without options)
Detergent
Phase N. Function Control Movement CYCLE
dispenser
90 60 50/40
0 Drain No Movement VAE + 2”+ 6” pause
1 Water fill P1+time PW ----- P1 + Qpw1 (*)
Prewash

4 Heating Temperature D55 30°
8 Drain ----- 20”
9 Water fill P1+time W P1+Qe
Water fill Refill P1+Qwe
10 Cold wash
Time N55 2 min.
11 Water fill P1+time W Qec
Water fill Refill P1+Qwe
12 Cold wash
Time 8 min.
N55(67°/64°-
13 Heating Temperature 67°/64° 53°/49° 44°/40°
44°/40°)E55(53°/49°)
Temperature 67°/64° 53°/49° 44°/40°
14 Maintenance E55
Time 10 min. 5 min. 40 min.
Wash
Temperature 44°/40°
15 Maintenance N55
Time 15 min.
16 Heating Temperature E55 67°/64° 53°/49° 44°/42°
N55(30 min.)
17 Maintenance Time 30 min. 25 min. 20 min.
E55(25 /20 min.)
Water fill Qc
19 Cooling
Time D55 2 min.
20 Drain ----- VAE+14”
21 Spin Time C1 5 min.
22 Drain Time 20”
23 Water fill P1+time PW No Movement P1+Qfr 1(*)
rinse
1st

27 Drain Time ----- 20”
28 Water fill P1+time W N55 P1+Qn2(*)
rinse
2nd

32 Drain Time ----- 20”
33 Water fill P1+time SF ------- P1+Q3rd(*)
Last rinse
(softener)
35 Water fill P1+time SF N55 Qn3e_90_40 Qn3e_60 Qn3e_90_40

38 Spin Movement CF_COT 9 min.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 19 599 37 30-10

5.3 Base programmes for Synthetics: cold - 30- 40 – 50 - 60° (without options)
Detergent
dispenser
90 60 40 30 *
1 Water fill P1+Time PW ----- P1 + Qpw1 (*)
Prewash

D55
9 Water fill P1+time W P1+Qsy(*)
Level N55 Refill P1+Qy1(*)
10 Cold wash
Time 2’
11 Heating Temperature E55 40°
N55 (90°/60°)
12 Heating Temperature 90° 60° 42°/39° 30° 20°
E55(42°/39°-30°-20°)
Wash
Temperature 42°/39° 20°

13 Maintenance
Time . 10 min 10 min
E55
14 Heating Temperature 90° 60° 42°/39° 30° 20°
16 Cooling Time W N55 Qc(*)
D55
18 Drain Time VAE+1 min.
20 Water fill P1+time PW P1+Qyr1(*)
E55
rinse
1st
22 Drain Level D55 AB_LEV+1 min.

23 Drain Level ----- 6”
24 Water fill P1+time W P1+Qyr2(*)
E55
rinse
2nd
26 Drain Level D55 AB_LEV+1 min.

27 Drain Level ----- 6”
28 Water fill P1 SF ----- P1
Last rinse
(softener)
30 Water fill P1 SF E55 Qyr3(*)

33 Spin Movement SYN_CF 4,5 min.
5.4 Wool programmes: cold - 30° - 40°
Detergent
dispenser
90 60 50/40
1 Water fill P1+time W ----- P1 + Qw0 (*)
Wash
2 Cold wash Time PWL_1_MOV Refill: P1+Qw01(*) 1 min.

4 Heating Temperature PWL_1_MOV 38°/35° 33°/30° 20°/10°
5 Maintenance Time PWL_1_MOV 14 min.
6 Drain Time ----- VAE +20”+14”
7 Water fill Level W No Movement P1
Rinses
1° & 2°
8 Water fill Level W PWL_1_MOV Qwor1

11 Water fill Level SF ----- P1
Last rinse
12 Maintenance Time ----- 30”

13 Water fill Level SF PWL_1_MOV Qwor2(*)
16 Spin Movement WOOL_CF 3,5 min.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 20 599 37 30-10

5.5 Programmes for Delicate fabrics: cold – 30° - 40° (without options)
Detergent
dispenser
60 50 40 30 *
1 Water fill P1+Time PW ----- P1 + Qpw1 (*)
Prewash

D55
9 Water fill Time W Qdw1(*)
Water fill Refill P1+Qdw2(*)
10 Cold wash
Time 1’
11 Heating Temperature D55 60° 50° 40° 30° 20°
Temperature 60° 50° 40° 30° 20°
Wash
12 Maintenance
Time 10 min.
13 Heating Temperature 60° 50° 40° 30° 20°
15 Drain Time ----- VAE
16 Drain Time D55 1 min.
18 Water fill P1+time W D55 P1+Qrd 1(*)
rinse
1st

21 Drain Level D55 1 min.
23 Water fill P1+time W D55 P1+Qrd1(*)
rinse
2nd

26 Drain Level D55 1 min.
28 Water fill P1 SF ------- P1
Last rinse
(softener)
30 Water fill P1 SF D55 Qrd2(*)

33 Spin Movement DEL_CF 3,8 min.
5.6 Hand-wash programmes: cold - 30° - 40°
Detergent
dispenser
90 60 50/40
1 Water fill Level W ----- P1 + Qw0 (*)
Wash
2 Cold wash Time PWL_1_MOV Refill: P1+Qw01(*) 1 min.

4 Heating Temperature PWL_4_MOV 38°/35° 33°/30° 20°/10°
6 Drain Time ----- VAE +20”+14”
7 Water fill Level W No Movement P1
Rinses
1° & 2°
8 Water fill Level W PWL_4_MOV Qwor1

Last rinse
12 Maintenance Time ----- 30”

13 Water fill Level SF PWL_4_MOV Qwor2(*)
16 Spin Movement WOOL_CF 3,5 min.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 21 599 37 30-10

5.7 JEANS programmes

60 40
1 Water fill Level ----- P1 + Qpw1(*)
2 Cold wash Time D55 Refill: P1+5 min.
Prewash
3 Water fill Time ----- Qpw2

4 Heating Temperature D55 30°
6 Drain+ Spin Time C0 4,5 min.
8 Water fill Level P1+Qhl
9 Cold wash Level N55 Refill: P1+Qw(*)+10 min.
Wash
11 Maintenance Temperature 10 min. 5 min.

12 Heating Temperature E55 60° 40°
13 Maintenance Temperature 20 min. 35 min.
14 Drain Level+time AB_LEV+14”
15 Drain+ Spin Time C1 5 min.
5.8 SHOES programmes
Detergent
dispenser
0 Drain No Movement VAE + 8”

1 Water fill Level PW ----- P1
2 Water fill Level W D55 Qdw1
Wash
3 Cold wash Time Qdw2+5 min.

4 Heating Temperature PROGRAMMA T°
D55
5 Maintenance Temperature 5 min.
7 Drain Level + time N55 VAE+20”
8 Water fill Level PW D55 P1+Qrd1
1°& 2°
Rinse
9 Maintenance Level D55 Refill P1
10 Drain Level+time ----- VAE+14”

11 Water fill Level SF No Movement P1
12 Maintenance Level+time 30 sec.
13 Water fill Level SF D55 Qrd2
rinse
3rd
14 Maintenance Level P1+3min.

16 Spin WOOL_CF 3,5 min.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 22 599 37 30-10

5.9 DUVET programmes
Detergent
dispenser

1 Water fill Level W ----- P1 + Qnt (140)
2 Cold wash Time Refill: P1+5 min.
Wash
4 Heating Temperature PROGRAMMA T°

D55
5 Maintenance Temperature 5 min.
7 Drain Level + time ----- VAE+14”
8 Spin IMP_BLANKET_II_650 4,3 min.
9 Wait Time 6”
10 Water fill Level PW No Movement P1+Qnt(130)
rinse
1st
11 Maintenance Level D55 Refill P1

14 Wait Time 6”
15 Water fill Level PW No Movement P1+Qnt(130)
rinse
2nd
16 Maintenance Level+time D55 P1+Qnt+5min.

19 Wait Time 6”
Last rinse

22 Water fill Level SF D55 125
23 Maintenance Level+time P1+8 min.
25 Spin IMP_BLANKET_III_650 4,6 min.
5.10 MINI PROGRAMME
Detergent
dispenser

1 Water fill Level W Qdw1
Wash
2 Cold wash Time Refill: P1+Qdw2

D55
3 Heating Temperature 30°/27°
4 Drain Level + time VAE+1 min.
5 Drain time ----- 6”
6 Water fill Level W P1+Qrd1
7 Maintenance Level D55 5 min.
rinse
1st

10 Water fill Level W P1+Qrd1
rinse
2nd

15 Maintenance Time D55 30”
Last rinse
16 Water fill Level SF Qrd2

D55
19 Spin CF_DEL 4,5 min.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 23 599 37 30-10

5.11 Drum movements at low speed and during spin
5.11.1 D55 Delicate movement

D55
sec rpm
12 0
4 55
12 0
4 -55
5.11.2 N55 Normal movement

N 55
sec rpm
8 0
8 55
8 0
8 -55
5.11.3 E55 Vigorous movement

E 55
sec rpm
3 0
10 55
3 0
10 -55
5.11.4 E55 Vigorous movement

E 55
sec rpm
3 0
10 50
3 0
10 -50
5.11.5 PWL_1 (wool) Delicate movement

PWL_1
sec rpm
40 0
1 35
40 0
1 -35
5.11.6 PWL_4 (hand wash) Delicate movement

PWL_4
sec rpm
57 0
1 35
57 0
1 -35
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 24 599 37 30-10

5.11.7 Cotton/Linen, Synthetics – C0 Intermediate Synthetics Prewash Spin
C0 (Prewash)
rpm sec AF
FUCS x no
300 0 no
FUCS x no
450 0 no
FUCS x no
450 5 no
650 0 no
5.11.8 C1 Cotton/Linen Wash Spin

C1 (wash)
rpm sec AF
FUCS x no
FUCS imp x no
FUCS x no
450 30 AF
650 15 AF
850 10 AF
850 60 no
5.11.9 C2 Cotton/Linen Intermediate Spin

C2 (intermediate)
rpm sec AF
FUCS x no
FUCS imp x no
FUCS x no
450 30 AF
650 20 AF
850 10 AF
1000 60 no
5.11.10 COT_CF Cotton/Linen Final Spin

COT_CF (cotton final)
rpm sec AF
FUCS x no
FUCS imp x no
FUCS x no
450 30 AF
650 15 AF
850 5 AF
1000 95 no
1150 75 no
1400 110 no
5.11.11 SYN_CF Synthetics Intermediate and Final Spin

SYN_CF
(intermediate/final)
rpm sec AF
FUCS x no
FUCS imp x no
FUCS x no
450 5 no
650 10 no
900 55 no
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 25 599 37 30-10

5.11.12 DEL_ CF Delicates Final Spin
CF (delicates final)
rpm sec AF
FUCS x no
FUCS imp x no
FUCS x no
450 35 AF
700 5 AF
900 20 AF
5.11.13 WOOL_CF Hand Wash and Wool Final Spin

CF (wool final)
rpm sec AF
FUCS x no
FUCS imp x no
FUCS x no
450 5 AF
650 1 AF
850 1 AF
1000 20 no
5.11.14 “Spin” Programme

Spin programme
rpm sec AF
FUCS x no
FUCS imp x no
FUCS x no
450 10 AF
650 10 AF
850 10 AF
1000 10 no
1150 10 no
1400 20 no
5.11.15 Easy-iron Impulse Cycle

EASY_IRON_IMP
rpm sec AF
FUCS x no
450 0 no
FUCS x no
650 0 AF
FUCS x no
800 0 AF
FUCS x no
900 0 AF
5.11.16 Intermediate Spin for Cotton/Linen with Super-rinse option

CSR
rpm sec AF
FUCS x no
FUCS imp x no
FUCS x no
450 120 AF
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 26 599 37 30-10

5.11.17 Wash and intermediate spin for DUVET
BLANKET II 650
rpm sec
0 0
FUCS x
FUCS imp x
FUCS x
450 5
650 140
5.11.18 Final spin for DUVET

BLANKET III 650
rpm sec
0 0
FUCS x
FUCS imp x
FUCS x
450 5
650 140
Notes:
AF indicates if antifoam function is active
FUCS antiunbalance function before spin phase
x variable duration
• In the diagrams the speed is indicated as rotations per minute and the time in seconds.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 27 599 37 30-10

5.12 Control of water level in tub
The water fill is carried out in two phases:

• level fill: is controlled by the closure of 1st level pressure switch in full position
• time fill: the duration is calculated by the electronic to fill the set quantity.
The different levels are determined by the model configuration and depend on the type of tub used.
5.12.1 Water fills for models with G20 tub (47 litres drum volume)
PRESSURE SWITCH LEVELS

Calibration in mm Quantity of filled water (litres)
Type
(full-reset) - Without clothes -
AB Anti-boiling (safety heater) 55 - 35 ≅ 3.9
P1 (1st level) 80 - 55 ≅ 6.5
Type Description of time fill Litres

Levels for COTTON/LINEN
Qpw1 First prewash water fill (all cycles) 3.5
Qpw2 Prewash water fill after cold wash (all cycles) 3.5
Qhl Normal water fill/half load 3.5
Qhl2 Half load water fill for “VERY SHORT” cycle 4.5
Qe Water fill for “energy label” cycle 4.5
Qwe Refill for “energy label” cycle if prewash has not been selected 0
Qw Wash refill if the cycle is not “energy label” 1.5
Qc Cooling water fill 3.0
Qs “Stains” compartment water fill 1.5
Qk Water fill for “quick cycle” rinses 12.5
Qn1 Normal water fill for 1st rinse 7.5
Qn2 Normal water fill for other rinses 9.0
Qn3 Normal water fill for last rinse 10.0
Qne Normal water fill for rinse of “energy label” cycle 4.0
Qsr1 Water fill for super-rinse and night cycle if no spin has occurred 5.5
Qsr2 Water fill for super-rinse and night cycle if spin has occurred 6.0
Levels for SYNTHETICS
Qsy Wash water fill 1.0
Qsy1 Wash water fill for VERY SHORT cycle 3.5
Qy1 Wash water fill if prewash has not been selected 2.0
Qyr1 Normal water fill for 1st rinse 8.0
Qyr2 Normal water fill for other rinses 8.0
Qyr3 Normal water fill for last rinse 9.5
Levels for DELICATES
Qdw1 Wash water fill 8.5
Qdw2 Wash refill 5.0
Qrd1 Normal water fill for 1st rinse and other rinses 10.0
Qrd2 Normal water fill for last rinse 11.0
Levels for WOOL
Qwo Wash water fill 10.0
Qwo1 Wash refill 5.0
Qwor1 Normal water fill for 1st rinse and other rinses 8.0
Qwor2 Normal water fill for last rinse 8.0
Levels for HAND WASH
Qwh Wash water fill 10.0
Qwh1 Wash refill 5.0
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 28 599 37 30-10

5.12.2 Water fills for models with G19 tub (42 litres drum volume)
PRESSURE SWITCH LEVELS

Calibration in mm Quantity of filled water (litres)
Type
(full-reset) - Without clothes -
AB Anti-boiling (safety heater) 55 - 35 ≅ 3.5
P1 (1st level) 80 - 55 ≅ 5.8
Type Description of time fill Litres

Levels for COTTON/LINEN
Qpw1 First prewash water fill (all cycles) 5.0
Qpw2 Prewash water fill after cold wash (all cycles) 1.0
Qhl Normal water fill/half load 5.0
Qhl2 Half load water fill for “VERY SHORT” cycle 5.5
Qe Water fill for “energy label” cycle 2.5
Qwe Refill for “energy label” cycle if prewash has not been selected 0
Qw Wash refill if cycle is not “energy label” 1.0
Qc Cooling water fill 4.0
Qs “Stains” compartment water fill 1.0
Qk Water fill for “short cycle” 12.0
Qn1 Normal water fill for 1st rinse 7.0
Qn2 Normal water fill for other rinses 8.0
Qn3 Normal water fill for last rinse 7.0
Qne Normal water fill for rinse of “energy label” cycle 4.5
Qsr1 Water fill for super-rinse and night cycle if no spin has occurred 8.0
Qsr2 Water fill for super-rinse and night cycle if spin has occurred 6.0
Levels for SYNTHETICS
Qsy Wash water fill 0
Qsy1 Wash water fill for VERY SHORT cycle 1.0
Qy1 Wash water fill if prewash has not been selected 1.0
Qyr1 Normal water fill for 1st rinse 8.0
Qyr2 Normal water fill for other rinses 8.0
Qyr3 Normal water fill for last rinse 10.0
Levels for DELICATES
Qdw1 Wash water fill 8.0
Qdw2 Wash refill 0
Qdr1 Normal water fill for 1st rinse and other rinses 10.0
Qdr2 Normal water fill for last rinse 10.0
Levels for WOOL
Qwo Wash water fill 8.0
Qwo1 Wash refill 0
Qwor1 Normal water fill for 1st rinse and other rinses 10.0
Qwor2 Normal water fill for last rinse 10.0
Levels for HAND WASH
Qwh Wash water fill 8.0
Qwh1 Wash refill 10.0
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 29 599 37 30-10

5.13 Profile of COTTON 60 Economy / Energy label cycle
1 1st rinse
P1+Qe 1st water fill
2 2nd rinse
P1+ Qwe Refill water rd
3 3 rinse
A Movement for 5 minutes
C1 C1 wash spin
B Movement for 35 minutes
C2 C2 intermediate spin
T1 Heating till 53°C
CF CF final spin
5.14 Profiles of COTTON 60° cycles
Cycle Water consumption (litres) Time (min)

A Economy or “energy label” 52 125
B Normal (consumer) 56 120
C Short (Daily) 56 100
D Very short 49 70
Note: The data are indicative, for the correct values please refer to those of the specific models.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 30 599 37 30-10

6 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
6.1 Control system memory
6.1.1 General structure of the memory system

The system features an EEPROM memory module, fitted externally to the microprocessor, which serves to
memorize the configuration data, the description of the cycle, the status of the appliance in the event of a
power failure, and the alarms.
Power Failure and

µP Machine status
External serial Internal serial

port ROM RAM port EEPROM
(external) Configuration of
(asynchronous) (Synchronous)
the appliance
Description
of the cycle
6.1.2 ROM
The ROM (Read-Only Memory) contains the firmware code relative to the functions of the appliance:
Ö Control of electrical loads (motor, pump, solenoid valves etc.).

Ö Control of the sensors (pressure switches, motor speed, door status etc.).
Ö Control of the user interface
Ö Control of the serial port
Ö Control of power failure procedure and alarms
Ö Execution of the washing programme
In normal production appliances, the ROM cannot be modified.
6.1.3 RAM
The RAM (Random-Access Memory) contains the variables, i.e. all the dynamic information used during
execution of the programme:
Ö Motor speed
Ö Water temperature
Ö Alarms
Ö Cycle selected
Ö Machine status
The RAM is cancelled when the power supply is disconnected (power failure or appliance switched off).
The contents of the RAM can be read using a computer connected via a DAAS interface.
The same system can be used to send commands to the electronic control unit such as:
Ö Select remote control mode

Ö Action the various loads in remote mode
Ö Select diagnostics mode
Ö Select a cycle and options, and start the cycle
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 31 599 37 30-10

6.1.4 EEPROM
The EEPROM contains data of various types:
Ö Power failure, i.e. the information necessary to restart the appliance in the event of a power failure:
- Selected cycle and options
- Current phase and sub-phase
Ö Machine status, used to perform special cycles such as:
- Electrical test (used in the assembly line)
- Continuous cycles (used in the factory workshop)
Ö Machine configuration: the data contained in the EEPROM define the characteristics of the model and
are interpreted by the function software. The variables are as follows
- Type of appliance (front-loader, top-loader, compact)
- Type of door interlock (PTC or instantaneous)
- Anti-flooding safety device
- Transmission ratio between drum pulley and motor pulley
- Structure of the washing group
- Power supply frequency (50/60 Hz)
- Type of PCB (horizontal or vertical buttons)
- Detergent drawer (3 or 4 compartments)
- Final spin speed (600 – 1400 rpm)
Ö Identification of the appliance:
- Prod. N.
- ELC
- Serial number
Ö Configuration of the user interface:
- Programmes on main selector
- Function of secondary selector (if featured)
- Number and functions of buttons
- Functions of the LEDs
- Operation of the buzzer
Ö Washing cycle tables: Each washing cycle consists of a series of phases (steps); the steps are the basic
instructions which comprise the description of the cycle, which is common to all appliances having the
same characteristics:
- Water fill
- Motor movement
- Reset
- Heating
- Drain
- Spin
- “IF” conditions (options, temperatures etc.)
- .........
Ö Configuration of the washing cycle: for each family of appliances, certain parameters associated with the
washing programme are defined:
- Operational limits (voltage/frequency)
- Transmission ratios
- Parameters for control of the signal from the tachometric generator
- Parameters for half-range operation of the motor
- Structure of the washing group
- Control parameters for the FUCS anti-unbalancing system
- Water fill control algorithm
- Alarm control system
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 32 599 37 30-10

6.2 Door interlock
There are two types of door interlock:
• voltmetric with PTC: it is always necessary to wait from 1 to 3 minutes before opening the door.
• instantaneous: the door can be opened as soon as the cycle ends.
6.3 Voltmetric interlock with PTC
1 PCB
10 Door interlock
11 Suppressor
12 “Door locked” pilot lamp
ON/OFF = Main switch

(Programme selector)
• When the washing programme is started by pressing the START/PAUSE button, the bi-metal PTC
(contacts 3-5) is powered by the triac on the PCB: after 2 – 4 seconds, this closes the switch (5-4) which
powers the electrical components of the appliance (only if the door is closed).
• The door interlock prevents aperture of the door while the appliance is in operation.
• At the end of the washing programme, the PCB disconnects the interlock from the power supply, but the
door remains locked for 1 to 2 minutes (PTC cooling time).
6.3.2 “Door locked” pilot lamp

Certain models feature a pilot lamp which lights to indicate that the door is locked. This pilot lamp switches
off when the door can be opened.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 33 599 37 30-10

6.4 Instantaneous door interlock
1 PCB
10 Door interlock
11 Suppressor
12 “Door locked” pilot lamp
ON/OFF = Main switch

(Programme selector))

• When the appliance is switched on using the programme selector, the ON/OFF switch closes and the bi-
metal PTC (contact 4-2) is powered; the door, however, is not locked.
• When the programme starts (START/PAUSE button), the PCB transmits a 20 msec voltage signal to
contacts 4-3 of the solenoid valve (at least 6 seconds must elapse after switching on); this signal locks
the door and, at the same time, closes the main switch (contacts 4-5) which powers all the components
in the appliance.
• At the end of the programme, the PCB transmits two 20 msec signals (at an interval of 200 msec).
- the first signal does not release the door.
- the second signal (which is transmitted only if the system functions correctly) releases the door
interlock and at the same time the contacts of the main switch are opened.
6.4.2 Conditions necessary for door release

Before transmitting the door release signals, the main PCB checks for the following conditions:
- the drum must be stationary (no signal from the tachometric generator)
- the water level must not be higher than the lower edge of the door
- the temperature of the water must not exceed 40°C
6.4.3 Automatic release device

In the event of a power failure, if the appliance is switched off, or if the solenoid should malfunction, the bi-
metal PTC cools over a period of 1 to 4 minutes, and then releases the door.
6.4.4 “Door locked” pilot lamp

Certain models feature a pilot lamp which lights to indicate that the door is locked. This pilot lamp switches
off when the door can be opened.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 34 599 37 30-10

6.5 Control pressure switch for water level in the tub
Control of the water level is performed by a three-level pressure switch which functions as follows:
• contact 11-14: anti-boiling safety level

• contact 21-24: first level
• contact 31-32: anti-overflow safety level (not all models)
6.5.1 Pressure switch settings
Full (mm) Reset (mm)

Anti-boiling level 55± 3 35± 3
1st level 80± 3 55± 3
Anti- overflow level 390± 15 240±50
6.5.2 Water fill without wash load
G20 tub (drum volume 47 l) G19 tub (drum volume 42 l)

Anti-boiling level (litres) 3,9 (3,5÷4) 3,5 (3,3÷3,8)
1st level (litres) 6,5 (6÷6,7) 5,8 (5,2÷6,3)
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 35 599 37 30-10

6.6 Water fill system
The solenoid valves are powered by the PCB via two triacs. The status of the pressure switch (empty/full) is
detected by two “sensing” lines.
1. PCB
2. Anti-boiling level
3. 1st level
4. Pre-wash solenoid
5. Wash solenoid
6. Heating element
AB_S Anti-boiling level sensor
L1_S 1st level sensor
6.6.1 Calculation of flow rate

Calculation of the capacity – necessary to determine the time for the supplementary fill – is performed by
measuring the time that elapses between the closure of the anti-boiling contact on FULL and the closure of
the 1st level contact.
Volume
Flow rate =
Time (T1-T2)
Volume = Volume of the tub between the two levels (anti-boiling and 1st level)
T1 –T2 = The time that elapses between the closure of the anti-boiling and 1st level contacts on FULL.
Water fill diagram
ELT = solenoid valve

P1 = 1st level
AB = anti-boiling level
rpm = drum rotation speed
Water in = water fill
Phase A: The phase during which the initial fill takes place:
1. Water fill until the anti-boiling pressure switch closes on FULL.
2. Water fill until the 1st level pressure switch closes on FULL: the delivery of the solenoid is
calculated during this phase.
3. Water fill for time Q, which varies according to delivery and cycle phase.
Phase B: If the 1st level pressure switch returns to EMPTY, a supplementary fill is performed until the
pressure switch returns to close on FULL. This phase may be followed by a further timer-
controlled fill.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 36 599 37 30-10

6.7 Detergent dispenser
There are two versions of the detergent drawer: one large drawer, and one smaller (ecological) drawer.
6.8 “Short” detergent dispenser
1. Fill hose
2. Gasket
3. Cable clamp
5. Cold water fill solenoid
7. Hose
8. Nozzle
9. Detergent dispenser duct
10.Detergent compartment
11. Steam venting hose
12.Detergent drawer
13. Siphon for conditioners
14.Detergent intake tube
15. Coupling clamp
Version with three compartments Version with four compartments
• Duct with 4 compartments • Duct with 4 compartments and fork

• Two-way water intake nozzle • Two-way water intake nozzle
• 3-compartment detergent drawer • 4-compartment detergent drawer
3 - 4 compartments: 2-way solenoid valve
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 37/57 599 37 30-10


(pre-wash solenoid)
• This solution is used in models with 3-compartment

detergent drawers. The detergent in compartment
“a” is introduced at the beginning of the pre-wash
phase.
• In certain models featuring the “stains” option,
compartment “a” may also be used for introduction
of a stain-removal product, which is introduced
during the washing phase.

(wash solenoid)
• In all models, compartment “b” contains the

detergent, which is introduced at the beginning of
the washing phase.

(pre-wash/wash solenoids)
• In all models, compartment “d” contains the

conditioner, which is introduced at the beginning of
the final rinse.
Water fill to pre-wash and bleach compartments

(pre-wash solenoid)
• In models with four compartments, water is ducted

through compartments “a” and “c”, which are not
used simultaneously.
• If the user selects the pre-wash option, water is
ducted through compartments “a” and “c” at the
beginning of the pre-wash phase.
• If this option is not selected, the water is ducted
through the compartments at the beginning of the
first rinse.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 38/57 599 37 30-10

6.9 “Long” detergent dispenser
1. Fill hose
2. Gasket
3. Cable clamp
5. Fill solenoid (cold water)
7. Hose
8. Nozzle
9. Detergent dispenser duct
12.Detergent drawer
13. Siphon for conditioners
14.Detergent intake hose
15. Coupling clamp
Version with three compartments Version with four compartments
• Duct with 4 compartments • Duct with 4 compartments and “flow deviator”

• Two-way water intake nozzle • Two-way water intake nozzle
• 3-compartment detergent dispenser • 4-compartment detergent dispenser
3 - 4 compartments: 2-way solenoid valve
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 39/57 599 37 30-10


(pre-wash solenoid)
• This solution is used in models with 3-compartment

detergent drawers. The detergent in compartment
“a” is introduced at the beginning of the pre-wash
phase.
• In certain models featuring the “stains” option,
compartment “a” may also be used for introduction
of a stain-removal product, which is introduced
during the washing phase.

(wash solenoid)
• In all models, compartment “b” contains the

detergent, which is introduced at the beginning of
the washing phase.

(pre-wash/wash solenoids)
• In all models, compartment “d” contains the

conditioner, which is introduced at the beginning of
the final rinse.
Water fill to pre-wash and bleach compartments

(pre-wash solenoid)
• In models with four compartments, water is ducted

through compartments “a” and “c”, which are not
used simultaneously.
• If the user selects the pre-wash option, water is
ducted through compartments “a” and “c” at the
beginning of the pre-wash phase.
• If this option is not selected, the water is ducted
through the compartments at the beginning of the
first rinse.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 40/57 599 37 30-10

6.10 Drain pump
1. PCB
2. Anti-boiling pressure switch
8. Drain pump
The PCB powers the drain pump via a triac as follows:
- for a pre-determined period

- until the anti-boiling pressure switch closes on EMPTY, after which the pump is actioned for a brief
period or passes to the subsequent phase.
6.11 Anti-flooding device
1. PCB
8. Drain pump
9. Anti-overflow pressure switch
HV1_S Anti-overflow level sensor
The third pressure switch level (if featured) is used as an anti-overflow safety device: if the pressure switch
contact should open in the FULL position, the PCB actions the drain pump until the pressure switch returns
to the EMPTY position.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 41/57 599 37 30-10

6.12 Heating
1. PCB
2. Anti-boiling pressure switch
3. 1st level pressure switch
6. Heating element
K1 Relay
L1_S 1st level sensor
The heating element is powered by a relay on the PCB via the contacts of the pressure switch when closed
on FULL.
6.13 Temperature sensor
The temperature is controlled by the PCB by means of a NTC temperature sensor.
1. NTC resistor
2. Metallic capsule
3. Terminals
4. Plastic casing
TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Ω)

(ºC) Nominal value Maximum value Minimum value
20 6050 6335 5765
60 1250 1278 1222
80 640 620 660
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 42/57 599 37 30-10

6.14 Motor
1. PCB
2. Anti-boiling/anti-foam
pressure switch
13. Motor
M = Rotor
P = Motor safety cut-out
S = Stator
T = Tachometric generator
AB_S Anti-boiling/anti-foam
level sensor
6.15 Power supply to motor

The PCB powers the motor via a triac. The direction of rotation is reversed by switching of the contacts on
the two relays (K2-K3), which modify the connection between the rotor and the stator.
In certain models, a third relay (K4) is used to power the stator (full or half field) according to the spin speed
The speed of rotation of the motor is determined by the signal received from the tachometric generator.
During the spin phases, the microprocessor, depending on the software configuration, may perform the anti-
foam control procedure (if featured) and the anti-unbalancing control procedure.
6.16 Anti-foam control system

The anti-foam control procedure (if featured) is performed via the anti-boiling pressure switch (AB).
Spin phase without foam Spin phase with little foam
Spin
Anti-foam Spin
( Level AB )
300 rpm pulses 300 rpm

pulses
FUCS FUCS
• Spin with little foam: if the contact of pressure switch AB closes on FULL, the spin phase is
interrupted; the drain pump continues to operate and, when the contact returns to EMPTY, the spin
phase is resumed.
• Spin with excessive foam in the tub (critical situation): The control system detects whether the
pressure switch commutates 5 times to FULL. In this case, the spin phase is skipped, and a one-minute
drain cycle is performed with the motor switched off; in the case of a washing phase, a supplementary
rinse is added.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 43/57 599 37 30-10

6.17 “FUCS” (Fast Unbalance Control System)
The control procedure for unbalanced loads is performed dynamically, before each spin cycle, as follows:
An initial phase is performed in which the direction of rotation of the drum is alternated at 55 rpm.
The phase begins at a speed of 55 rpm; the speed can never fall below this threshold, otherwise the
check is repeated.
At intervals of 300 ms, the balance is calculated and compared with predetermined limits. If the value is
less than the lower limit, the speed of the drum is increased by 2 rpm; if the value is higher, the speed of
the drum is reduced by 2 rpm. The reduction in the speed of the drum distributes the washing correctly;
this procedure is repeated until the wash load is completely balanced.
Correct balancing of the wash load is achieved at a speed of 115 rpm, after which the spin cycle begins.
The Unbalancing Control function takes place in four phases; each phase is characterized by an
unbalancing threshold and a time-out (maximum time).
Phase 0: Phase 0 has a predetermined unbalancing threshold; if correct balancing of the wash load is
achieved, the appliance performs a 470 rpm spin pulse, preceded by 5 seconds at 100 rpm and
followed by phase 1; otherwise, after a maximum of 60 seconds, the cycle passes directly to
phase 1.
Phase 1: The first phase has a different preset unbalancing threshold: if correct balancing is achieved, the
appliance performs the spin cycle, preceded by 5 seconds at 100 rpm. If not, after a maximum of
120 seconds, the cycle passes to phase 2.
Phase 2: The pre-determined unbalancing threshold in the second phase is different: if correct balancing is
not achieved within 60 seconds, the function passes to phase 3.
Phase 3: The third phase has a pre-determined unbalancing threshold: if correct balancing is achieved
within 90 seconds, a spin pulse is performed, preceded by 5 seconds at 100 rpm and followed by
a repeat of phase 1. If the load is highly unbalanced after the second attempt for phase 3, the
spin cycle is skipped; if balancing is not perfect, a reduced-speed spin is performed.
6.17.1 Examples of operation of the unbalancing control function

The examples shown below describe the operation of an appliance with a final spin speed of 1000 rpm.
Perfect balancing
Low speed
FUCS phase 0 + spin pulse
Low speed
FUCS phase 1
Normal spin
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 44/57 599 37 30-10

Balancing after two attempts:
Low speed
FUCS phase 0
FUCS phase 1
FUCS phase 2
Balancing after the third phase

Normal spin
FUCS phase 0 with spin pulse

FUCS phase 1
FUCS phase 2
FUCS phase 1
FUCS phase 2
FUCS phase 3
Normal spin
Balancing after the third phase

Reduced-speed spin
FUCS phase 0
FUCS phase 1
FUCS phase 2
FUCS phase 1
FUCS phase 2
FUCS phase 3
Reduced-speed spin
Unbalancing after the third phase:
FUCS phase 0
FUCS phase 1
FUCS phase 2
FUCS phase 3
FUCS phase 1
FUCS phase 2
FUCS phase 3
No spin
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 45/57 599 37 30-10

7 DEMO MODE
Horizontal push-buttons Vertical push-buttons
1. Switch off the appliance 1. Switch off the appliance

2. Press and hold down START/PAUSE and 2. Press and hold down buttons 2 and 3
any one of the option buttons simultaneously.
simultaneously. 3. Holding down both buttons, switch the
3. Holding down both buttons, switch the appliance on by turning the programme
appliance on by turning the programme selector two positions to the right
selector two positions to the right (clockwise).
(clockwise). 4. Continue to hold down buttons 2 and 3 until the
4. Continue to hold down the START/PAUSE LEDs begin to flash (at least 2 seconds).
and option buttons until the LED begins to
flash (at least 2 seconds).
Remark: The START/PAUSE button can be
configured according to the styling of the
model, and is therefore not always in the
position shown in the figure!
7.1 Exiting DEMO mode

To exit the demo cycle, switch the appliance off (programme selector in off/cancel position)
8 DIAGNOSTICS SYSTEM
8.1 Access to diagnostics mode

1. Switch off the appliance. 1. Switch off the appliance.

2. Press and hold down START/PAUSE and any 2. Press and hold down buttons 2 and 3 (see
one of the option buttons simultaneously. picture)
3. Holding down both buttons, switch the appliance 3. Holding down both buttons, switch the appliance
on by turning the programme selector one on by turning the programme selector one
position to the right (clockwise). position to the right (clockwise).
4. Continue to hold down the START/PAUSE and 4. Continue to hold down buttons 2 and 3 until the
option buttons until the LED begins to flash (at LEDs begin to flash (at least 2 seconds).
least 2 seconds).
Remark: The START/PAUSE button can be In the first selector position, the operation of the
configured according to the styling of the model, buttons and the relative LEDs is checked; turning
and is therefore not always in the position shown the selector knob clockwise activates the
in the figure! diagnostics cycle for the operation of the various
In the first selector position, the operation of the components and the alarm reading.
buttons and the relative LEDs is checked; turning
the selector knob clockwise activates the
diagnostics cycle for the operation of the various
components and the alarm reading.
8.2 Exiting diagnostics mode
→ To exit the diagnostics cycle, switch the appliance off, then on, and then off again.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 46/57 599 37 30-10

8.3 Diagnostics phases
Irrespective of the type of PCB (i.e. with horizontal or vertical buttons) and the configuration of the
programme selector it is possible, after entering diagnostics mode, to perform diagnostics on the operation
of the various components and to read the alarms by turning the programme selector clockwise.
All the alarms are enabled during the diagnostics cycle.
Selector
Components actioned Operating conditions Function checked
position
- All the LEDs light in sequence
- When a button is pressed, the Operation of the
1 Always activated
corresponding LED lights (and user interface
the buzzer, if featured, sounds)
Door locked
Water ducted
- Door interlock Water level below anti-
2 through washing
- Washing solenoid flooding level
compartment
Maximum time 5 minutes
Door locked
Water ducted
3 through pre-wash
- Pre-wash solenoid flooding level
compartment
Door locked
Water ducted
4 through conditioner
- Pre-wash and wash solenoids flooding level
compartment
- Door interlock
Door locked
- Washing solenoid if the level of
Water level above 1st level
6 water in the tub is below 1st Heating
Maximum time 10 minutes or
level
up to 90°C (*)
- Heating element
- Door interlock
- Washing solenoid if the level of
water in the tub is below 1st
Door locked Check for leaks
7 level
Water level above 1st level from the tub
- Motor (55 rpm clockwise, 55
rpm counter-clockwise, 250 rpm
impulse)
Drain and spin;
- Door interlock
Door locked control of
- Drain pump
8 Water level lower than anti- congruence in
- Motor up to 650 rpm then at
boiling level for spinning closure of level
maximum spin speed
pressure switches
(*) In most cases, this time is sufficient to check the heating. However, the time can be increased by
repeating the phase without draining the water: pass for a moment to a different phase of the diagnostics
cycle and then back to the heating control phase (if the temperature is higher than 80°C, heating does not
take place).
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 47/57 599 37 30-10

9 ALARMS
9.1 User alarm display

Control of the alarm system can be configured; according to the model, therefore, some or all of the
alarms may be displayed to the user.
Normally, all alarms are displayed for the used, with the exception of:
♦ E61 (insufficient heating during the washing phase)

♦ E83 (error in selector reading)
9.1.1 Operation of the alarm system during normal use

The alarms are enabled during the execution of the washing programme, with the exception of alarms
associated with configuration and the power supply (voltage/frequency), which are also displayed during the
programme selection phase.
The door can normally be opened (except where specified) when an alarm condition has occurred on
condition that:
• The level of the water in the tub is below 1st level

• The temperature of the water is lower than 40°C.
Certain alarm conditions require that a drain phase be performed before the door can be opened:
• Cooling water fill if the temperature is in excess of 60°C.

• Drain until closure of both pressure switch contacts (1st level and anti-boiling safety system) on EMPTY
within a maximum of 5 minutes.
9.1.2 Alarms displayed during normal operation
The type of alarm condition is displayed to the user by the repeated flashing of the
END OF CYCLE LED (0.4 seconds lit, 0.4 seconds off, with an interval of 2.5
seconds between sequences). This LED is featured on ALL MODELS, though
configured in different positions.
All the LEDs flash to indicate a configuration error.
If, for example, the user should forget to close the door, the END OF CYCLE LED
control system will detect alarm E41 about 15 seconds after
the start of the cycle; the cycle remains in PAUSE mode and Time
ON / OFF Value
the LED flashes repeatedly in the sequence shown in the (sec.)
table. 0.4 1
The four flashes indicate the first of the two digits of alarm E41 0.4
(the alarms for a given function are grouped in “families”).
0.4 2
In this case, after closing the door, it is sufficient to press
START in order to re-start the programme. 0.4
0.4 3
0.4
0.4 4
0.4
Pause
2.5 between
sequences
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 48/57 599 37 30-10

9.2 Reading the alarm codes
In order to read the last alarm code memorized in the EEPROM on the PCB:
• Enter diagnostics mode.
• Irrespective of the type of PCB and configuration, turn the programme
selector clockwise to the tenth position.
9.2.1 Displaying the alarm

The alarm is displayed by a repeated flashing sequence of the two LEDs (0.4
seconds lit, 0.4 seconds off, with an interval of 2.5 seconds between sequences).
The buzzer (if featured) will sound “bips” in synchronization with the flashing of
the LEDs:
• END OF CYCLE LED → indicates the first digit of the alarm code (family)
• START/PAUSE → indicates the second digit of the alarm code (number
within the family)
These two LEDs are featured on all models (though they are configured
differently), and flash simultaneously.
Notes:
• The first letter of the alarm code “E” (Error) is not displayed, since this letter is common to all alarm
codes.
• The alarm code “families” are shown in hexadecimal; in other words:
→ A is represented by 10 flashes
→ B is represented by 11 flashes
→ ...
→ F is represented by 15 flashes
• Configuration errors are shown by the flashing of all the LEDs (user interface not configured).
9.2.2 Examples of alarm displays

Example: Alarm E43 (problems with the door interlock Triac) will display the following:
• the sequence of four flashes of the END OF CYCLE LED indicates the first number (E43);
• the sequence of three flashes of the START/PAUSE LED indicates the second number (E43).
END-OF-CYCLE LED START/PAUSE LED

Time Time
ON / OFF Value ON / OFF Value
(Sec.) (Sec.)
0.4 0.4
1 1
0.4 0.4
0.4 0.4
2 2
0.4 0.4
0.4 0.4
3 3
0.4 0.4
0.4
4
0.4 3,3 Pause
2.5 Pause
9.2.3 Operation of alarms during diagnostics

All alarms are enabled during the components diagnostics phase.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 49/57 599 37 30-10

9.3 Rapid reading of alarm codes
The last alarm code can be displayed even if the programme selector is not in the tenth position
(diagnostics) or if the appliance is in normal operating mode (e.g. during the execution of the washing
programme):
→ Press and hold down START/PAUSE and any of the option buttons for at least two seconds: the
LEDs initially switch off, and then display the flashing sequence corresponding to the alarm.
→ The alarm sequence continues as long as the two buttons are held down.
→ The alarm reading system is as described in paragraph 8.2.1.
→ While the alarms are displayed, the appliance continues to perform the cycle or, if in the programme
selection phase, maintains the previously-selected options in memory.
9.4 Cancelling the last alarm

It is good practice to cancel the last alarm:
• after reading the alarm code, to check whether the alarm re-occurs during diagnostics
• after repairing the appliance, to check whether it re-occurs during testing.
1. Select diagnostics mode and turn the 1. Select diagnostics mode and turn the
programme selector to the tenth position programme selector to the tenth position
(reading of alarms). (reading of alarms)
2. Press and hold down START/PAUSE and any 2. Press and hold down buttons 2 and 3 at the
of the option buttons at the same time. same time.
3. Hold down the START/PAUSE and option 3. Hold them down until the LEDs begin to flash (at
buttons until the LEDs begin to flash (at least 2 least 2 seconds).
seconds).
Important: The START/PAUSE button is

configurable depending on the styling of the
model, and is not necessarily in the position
shown in the figure!
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 50/57 599 37 30-10

9.5 Table of alarm codes
Alarm Description Possible fault Action/machine status Reset
Tap closed or mains pressure insufficient; drain hose incorrectly
positioned; water fill solenoid faulty; leaks from the hydraulic
E11 Difficulties in water fill for washing circuit of the pressure switch; pressure switch faulty; wiring
Cycle paused Start
faulty; PCB faulty.
Drain hose incorrectly positioned; mains pressure insufficient;
E13 Water leakage water fill solenoid faulty; leakage/blockage of pressure switch Cycle paused Start
hydraulic circuit; pressure switch faulty.
Drain hose kinked/blocked/incorrectly positioned; drain filter
E21 Difficulties in draining blocked/dirty; drain pump faulty; wiring faulty; PCB faulty; Cycle paused Start
current leakage from heating element to ground.
Safety drain cycle – Cycle stopped
E23 Drain pump triac faulty Drain pump faulty; wiring faulty; PCB faulty.
with door open
OFF
Fault in “sensing” circuit of drain pump Safety drain cycle – Cycle stopped
E24 PCB faulty.
with door released
OFF
triac
Incongruence between closure of anti-
Pressure switch faulty; current leakage from heating element to Safety drain cycle – Cycle stopped
E33 boiling and 1st level pressure switch ground; heating element; wiring faulty; PCB faulty. with door open
OFF
contacts
Water fill solenoid faulty; leakage from pressure switch Cycle blocked. Safety drain cycle.
E35 Water overflow (flooding) hydraulic circuit; pressure switch faulty; wiring faulty; PCB Drain pump always in operation (5 OFF
faulty. minutes on, 5 minutes off etc.)
Fault in “sensing” circuit of anti-boiling
E36 PCB faulty. Cycle blocked, door locked. OFF
pressure switch
E37 1st level sensing circuit faulty PCB faulty. Cycle blocked, door locked. OFF
E39 “HV” sensor of anti-overflow level faulty PCB faulty. Cycle blocked, door locked. OFF
E41 Door open Door interlock faulty; wiring faulty; PCB faulty. Cycle paused Start
E42 Problems of door closure Door interlock faulty; wiring faulty; PCB faulty. Cycle paused Start
E43 Interlock power supply triac faulty Door interlock faulty; wiring faulty; PCB faulty. (Safety drain cycle) Cycle blocked OFF
E44 Door interlock sensor faulty PCB faulty. (Safety drain cycle) Cycle blocked OFF
E45 Door interlock sensing circuit triac faulty PCB faulty (Safety drain cycle) Cycle blocked OFF
Cycle blocked, door locked (after 5
E51 Motor power supply triac short-circuited PCB faulty; current leakage from motor or from wiring. attempts)
OFF
No signal from motor tachometric Cycle blocked, door locked (after 5
E52 Motor faulty; wiring faulty; PCB faulty
attempts)
OFF
generator
E53 Motor triac sensing circuit faulty PCB faulty. Cycle blocked, door locked OFF
Cycle blocked, door locked (after 5
E54 Motor relay contacts sticking PCB faulty; current leakage from motor or from wiring
attempts)
OFF
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 51/57 599 37 30-10

Alarm Description Possible fault Action/machine status Reset
NTC sensor faulty; heating element faulty; wiring faulty; PCB
E61 Insufficient heating during washing faulty.
The heating phase is skipped ---
NTC sensor faulty; heating element faulty; wiring faulty; PCB Safety drain cycle – Cycle stopped
E62 Overheating during washing faulty. with door open
OFF
Safety drain cycle – Cycle stopped
E66 Heating element power relay faulty PCB faulty; current leakage from heating element to ground.
with door open
OFF
E71 Washing NTC sensor faulty NTC sensor faulty; wiring faulty; PCB faulty. The heating phase is skipped Start
E82 Error in selector reset position PCB faulty. --- OFF
E83 Error in reading selector Incorrect configuration data; PCB faulty. Cycle cancelled ---
E93 Incorrect configuration of appliance Incorrect configuration data; PCB faulty. Cycle interrupted OFF
E94 Incorrect configuration of washing cycle Incorrect configuration data; PCB faulty. Cycle interrupted OFF
Communications error between
E95 PCB faulty. Cycle interrupted OFF
microprocessor and EEPROM
Incongruency between hardware version
E96 Incorrect configuration data; PCB faulty. Cycle interrupted OFF
and configuration
Incongruency between selector and cycles
E97 Incorrect configuration data; PCB faulty. Cycle interrupted OFF
configuration
EB1 Frequency of appliance incorrect Power supply problems (incorrect / disturbance); PCB faulty. Cycle interrupted ---
EB2 Voltage too high Power supply problems (incorrect / disturbance); PCB faulty. Cycle interrupted ---
EB3 Voltage too low Power supply problems (incorrect / disturbance); PCB faulty. Cycle interrupted ---
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 52/57 599 37 30-10

10 BASIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
10.1 Version with instantaneous-aperture interlock
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 53/57 599 37 30-10

10.2 Version with PTC interlock
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 54/57 599 37 30-10

10.3 Key to circuit diagram
Components in the appliance Components of the PCB

1. Electronic board DOOR_TY Interlock triac
2. Suppressor DRAIN_TY Drain pump triac
3. Door interlock K1 Heating element relay
4. 1st level pressure switch K2 Motor relay (clockwise rotation)
5. Anti-boiling pressure switch K3 Motor relay (counter-clockwise rotation)
6. Anti-overflow pressure switch (not all models) K4 Motor relay: half-range power (not all models)
7. Heating element MOTOR_TY Motor triac
8. Stator (motor) ON/OFF Main switch (on programme selector)
9. Thermal overload cut-out (motor) PWELW_TY Pre-wash solenoid triac
10. Tachometric generator (motor) Serial interface Asynchronous serial interface
11. Rotor (motor) WELV_TY Wash solenoid triac
12. Drain pump
13. Pre-wash solenoid valve
14. Wash solenoid valve
16. “Door locked” pilot lamp (not all models)
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 55/57 599 37 30-10

11 ACCESS TO THE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
11.1.1 Top panel
a. Remove the two rear screws, push the top panel towards the
rear and release from the cabinet.
1. Electronic control system

2. Control panel
3. Solenoid valve
5. Pressure switch
6. Tub
11.1.2 Control panel
b c
a. Remove the top panel.

b. Remove the detergent drawer. e
c. Remove the screws which secure the front of the control
panel to the support cross-member.
d. Remove the upper screws and release the anchor tabs
from the support.
e. Remove the control panel by releasing it from the lower
right-hand guide. To facilitate its release, loosen the screw
which secures it to the cabinet and raise the control panel
slightly.
When re-assembling, ensure that the knobs are replaced in the correct positions.
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 56/57 599 37 30-10

11.1.3 Electronic control board
1. PCB assembly + casing

2. Cover for connectors
3. Spindle of programme selector knob
4. Cover for connectors
5. Spindle of secondary selector knob
6. Pushbutton support panel
7. Pushbutton
8. LED diffuser
a. Remove the control panel.

b. Detach the cover for the connectors from the control
board casing.
c. Detach the wiring from the PCB.
d. If necessary, remove the coloured diffusers from the
board casing.
e. Remove the knob flanges from the spindles of the b
selectors.
f. Remove the spindles from the selectors. Ensure that
the position of the selectors is as shown in the figure,
i.e. CANCEL/OFF for the programme selector, last
clockwise position for the secondary selector. Use
pliers to remove the spindle of the second selector (if e
featured): this operation may damage the plastic
board casing; it is therefore advisable to use a new
spindle for the new board.
g. Remove the four screws which secure the
pushbutton support panel to the board and remove
the support/pushbutton assembly.
h. Remove the other screw which secures the board to
the control panel support.
i. Release the two anchor tabs and remove the
electronic board assembly.
g
h
SOI/DT 2005-09 dmm 57/57 599 37 30-10

SZERVIZKÖZLEMENY
MOSÁS
2520 - 2530
TACHOMETRIKUS GENERÁTOROK ÉS KOMMUTÁTORHOZ HASZNÁLT KEFÉK /

MOSÓGÉPEKBEN ÉS SZÁRÍTÓKBAN HASZNÁLT ASZINKRON MOTOROK
ÖSSZEGZÉSE, 02. Rev.
A 650 - 1800 ford./perc centrifugálási sebességű modellekben használt kommutátor motorok gyártója:
• SOLE / ACC / NIDEC

• FHP
• CESET
• BSH
• ECM
• WELLING
Ezen motorok mindegyike beszerelhető gyárilag ugyanabba a modellbe. Ezért előfordulhat, hogy az azonos
modellekhez cserealkatrészként különböző gyártók által készített motorokat bocsátanak rendelkezésre, az
eredeti helyett. Az eredeti motor a fent felsorolt, különböző gyártóktól származó motorokkal teljes mértékben
cserélhető.
Mindegyik motortípushoz rendelkezésre állnak a megfelelő tachometrikus generátorok és kefék.
Mivel nem lehet meghatározni a cserealkatrész-szám alapján, hogy az adott készülékbe milyen motort
szereltek, javasoljuk, hogy ellenőrizze magát a gyártót:
Ilymód megkaphatja a megfelelő cserealkatrész-számot a kefékhez és generátorokhoz. Ha kétségei vannak,
a motor adattábláján megtalálja a gyártási kódot (124xxxxxx_132xxxxxx_147xxxxxx). Az alábbi táblázat a
pontos alkatrészszámokat valamint a motortekercsek ellenállás értékét tartalmazza .
Beszállító Tachometrikus generátor alkatr.sz. Kefe alkatr.sz.

Gyártva 1992 júliusig
504 Ω tekercses
(sorozatszám. 230...)
SOLE változat: fehér támogatás:
/ 5020 48 73-00/9
5068 17 42-00/8
ACC
/ 184 Ω tekercses
1992 augusztustól
NIDEC (sorozatszám. 231...)
változat: fekete támogatás:
5022 90 52-00/1
5022 65 88-00/7
1990 augusztusig
Gyártva 1997-ig:
5021 25 04-00/0
5068 04 90-00/5
FHP 1990 szeptembertől

Gyártás kezdete
400 60 20-34/3
1997/98:
(leváltja a következő
5024 01 54-00/0
alkatr.számot
5022 17 78-00/9)
CESET 5023 20 55-00/9 5021 63 97-00/5
HU Kiadványszám. 599 70 65-97 02. Rev. 11/2010 dmm
599 70 65-97 1/6

Kommutátor motorok - Összegzés
UNIVERZÁLIS MOTOROK (10-érintkezős csatlakozódobozzal)

Centrifugálási Tárcsa Tekercsellenállás (Ω) Alkatrészszámok. (*)
Motorkód Márka Típus V/Hz ½ mező Állórész Forgórész Tacho Tachometrikus
sebesség Ø mm Kefe
(1-5/10) (5-10) (8-9) (3-4) generátor
12403680.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584014 220-240/50 650-850 21,5 nem 1,48÷1,71 1,67÷1,92 504±7% 50204873009 50226588007
12403690.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584027 220-240/50 1000-1500 25,26 0,59±7% 1,18±7% 2,2±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12405280.. FHP UO 112 G40 220-240/50 850-1000 21,26 nem 1,7±7% 1,95±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12405282.. FHP UO 112 G40 220-240/50 850-1000 21,26 nem 1,7±7% 1,95±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12405290.. FHP UOZ 112 G63 220-240/50 1000-1500 25,26 0,55±7% 1,1±7% 2,15±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12405390.. FHP UOZ 112 G63 220-240/50 1000-1200 21,26 0,52±7% 1,2±7% 1,75±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12405480.. CESET MCA38/64.148/ZN1 220-240/50 850-1000 21,5 nem 1,07±7% 2,28±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12405481.. CESET MCA38/64.148/ZN5 230-240/50 850-1000 21,5 nem 1,86±7% 2,46±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12406500.. FHP U 112 G63 220-240/50 1000 25,26 nem 0,98÷1,34 1,97÷2,27 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12406510.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584028 220-240/50 1000 25,26 nem 1,09÷1,26 2,04÷2,34 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12408470.. CESET MCA30/64.148/ZN4 220-240/50 600-850 16,4 nem 1,95±7% 2,57±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12408471.. CESET MCA30/64.148/ZN4 220-240/50 600-850 16,4 nem 1,95±7% 2,57±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12421230.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584513 230-240/50 1150 21,5 nem 1,07±7% 1,6±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12421390.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584514 230-240/50 1150 21,5 0,89±7% 1,77±7% 2,14±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12421391.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584514 230-240/50 1150 21,5 0,89±7% 1,77±7% 2,14±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12423100.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584020 220-240/50 1000 21,5 nem 1,03÷1,17 1,62÷1,87 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12427070.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584024 220-240/50 1000-1200 21,5 0,55±7% 1,1±7% 1,75±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12427071.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584024 220-240/50 1000-1200 21,5 0,55±7% 1,1±7% 1,75±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12427073.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584024 220-240/50 1000-1200 21,5 0,55±7% 1,1±7% 1,75±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12427170.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20580052 230-240/50 1000 19 nem 1,65±7% 1,8±7% 504±7% 50204873009 50226588007
12427270.. CESET MCA38/64.148/ZN3 220-240/50 1000 19 nem 1,07±7% 2,28±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12427780.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 205880052 230-240/50 850-1000 21,5 nem 1,65±7% 1,8±7% 504±7% 50204873009 50226588007
12430180.. CESET MCA61/64.148/ZN10 230-240/50 1000-1600 25,26 0,37±7% 1,5±7% 1,8±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12430470.. FHP U0Z 112 G63 220-240/50 1600 25,26 1,1±7% 2,92±7% 1,63±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12430471.. FHP U0Z 112 G63 220-240/50 1600 25,26 1,1±7% 2,92±7% 1,63±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12430472.. FHP U0Z 112 G63 220-240/50 1600 25,26 1,1±7% 2,92±7% 1,63±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12430610.. FHP UO 112 G40 230-240/50 650-850 16,4 nem 1,7±7% 1,95±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12430620.. CESET MCA38/64.148/ZN9 230-240/50 600-850 16,4 nem 1,75±7% 2,3±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12430980.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584087 230/50 1600 25,26 0,47±7% 1,3±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12430990.. FHP UZ 112 G63 230-240/50 1150 21,26 nem 1,12±7% 1,75±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12439100,, FHP UZ 112 G63 230-240/50-60 1150 21,26 nem 1,09±7% 1,5±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12439101.. FHP UZ 112 G63 230-240/50 1150 21,26 nem 1,09±7% 1,5±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12458150.. CESET MCC61/64.148/ZN9 230-240/DC 1000-1600 25,26 0,37±7% 1,8±7% 1,64±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12461790.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584603 240/50 1600 25,26 0,56±7% 1,43±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12461791.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584603 240/50 1600 25,26 0,56±7% 1,43±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12466020.. FHP UOZ112 G55 220-240/50 1000-1200 21,26 0,62±7% 1,23±7% 1,6±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12461792.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584603 240/50 1600 25,26 0,56±7% 1,43±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12466021.. FHP U112 G55 220-240/50 1000 21,26 nem 1,23±7% 1,6±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12467840.. FHP UOZ112 G63 240/50 1400 25,26 0,63±7% 1,35±7% 2,6±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
599 70 65-97 2/6
Centrifugálási Tárcsa Tekercsellenállás (Ω) Alkatrészszámok. (*)
(1-5/10) (5-10) (8-9) (3-4) generátor
12471900.. FHP UOZ112 G63 200/60 1000-1200 21,26 0,5±7% 1,01±7% 1,82±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12474470.. FHP UOZ112 G63 230/50 850-1400 25,26 0,59±7% 1,35±7% 2,2±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12483510.. CESET MCA61/64.148/ZN4 230-240/50 1400 25,26 0,6±7% 1,88±7% 1,78±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12483520.. CESET MCA61/64.148/ZN3 230-240/50 1200 21,5 0,6±7% 1,88±7% 1,78±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12492030.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584027 220-240/50 1050-1200 21,5 0,59±7% 1,18±7% 2,2±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12494610.. CESET MCA52/64.148/ZN4 230-240/50 1000 21,5 nem 1,3±7% 1,9±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
13205550.. CESET MCA61/64.148/ZN14 230-240/50 1200 21,5 nem 1,13±7% 1,78±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
13207990.. FHP UOZ 112 G70 230/50 1600 25,26 0,41±7% 1,26±7% 1,75±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
13211010.. FHP UOZ 112 G63 210-230/60 1150 21,26 0,53±7% 1,00±7% 1,75±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
13219502.. BSH 1BA6755 230-240/50 1150 21,5 nem 1,67±7% 1,62±7% --------------- --------------- ---------------
13222780.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584615 220/60 1400 25,26 0,48±7% 0,96±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
13230360.. ECM UAH522300-82R01 230-240/50 1000-1200 21,5 0,73±7% 1,46±7% 2±7% 91±7% --------------- 50216397005
13230570.. ECM UAH382300-51R01 230-240/50 850 16,4 nem 1,95±7% 2,3±7% 91±7% --------------- 50216397005
13252870.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584024 220-240/50 1000 21,5 0,55±7% 1,1±7% 1,77±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
13252970.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584087 230/50 1600 25,26 0,45±7% 1,25±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
14711100.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584616 200-240/50 1000 19 0,61 1,23 1,72 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
(*) jelenleg gyártásban lévő alkatrészszámok
Csatlakozódoboz
½ mező Állórész Forgórész Tacho
Megjegyzések a tekercseléssel kapcsolatban: 1-5/10 5-10 8-9 3-4
ª Ellenőrizze a csatlakozókat (huzalozást) és, hogy nincsenek-e kilógó vagy megtört érintkezők.
ª Ellenőrizze, nincsenek-e vízre vagy mosóporrautaló jelek vagy ilyen lerakodások, illetve vizsgálja meg azok okait
ª Ellenőrizze a földelt tekercseket / alkatrészeket (illetve a gyenge földelésűeket) egy minimum 40 MΩ teljesítményű
teszterrel, az egyes érintkező és a ház (vörös ∞) között.
ª Ellenőrizze mindegyik tekercselést a táblázat alapján.
P=motorvédő
R=forgórész
S=állórész
T=tachometrikus
599 70 65-97 3/6

Centrifugális Tárcsa Tekercsellenállás (Ω) Alkatrészszámok. (*)
(1-2/5) (2-5) (3-4) (6-7) generátor
12405481.. CESET MCA38/64.148/ZN5 230-240/50 850-1000 21,5 nem 1,86±7% 2,46±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12405482.. CESET MCA38/64.148/ZN5 230-240/50 850-1000 21,5 nem 1,86±7% 2,46±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12408472.. CESET MCA30/64.148/ZN4 220-240/50 600-850 16,4 nem 1,95±7% 2,57±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12408473.. CESET MCA30/64.148/ZN4 220-240/50 600-850 14,5 nem 1,95±7% 2,57±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12421392.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584514 230-240/50 1150 21,5 0,89±7% 1,77±7% 2,14±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12421393.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584549 230/50 1400 25,26 0,67±7% 1,77±7% 2,14±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12430611.. FHP UO 112 G40 230-240/50 650-850 16,4 nem 1,7±7% 1,95±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12430621.. CESET MCA38/64.148/ZN9 230-240/50 600-850 16,4 nem 1,75±7% 2,3±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
12439102.. FHP UZ 112 G63 230-240/50-60 1150 21,26 nem 1,09±7% 1,5±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12439103.. FHP UZ 112 G63 230-240/50 1150 21,26 nem 1,09±7% 1,5±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12461792.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584603 240/50 1600 25,26 0,56±7% 1,43±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
12466025.. FHP UOZ112G55 230-240/50 1150 21,5 0,62±7% 1,23±7% 1,65±7% 137±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12483501.. FHP U 112 G30 230-240/50 650-850 16,4 nem 2,07±7% 2,85±7% 137±7% 50240154000 4006020343
12494611.. CESET MCA52/64.148/ZN4 230-240/50 1000 21,5 nem 1,3±7% 1,9±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
13205551.. CESET MCA61/64.148/ZN14 230-240/50 1200 21,5 nem 1,13±7% 1,78±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
13207991.. FHP UOZ 112 G70 230/50 1600 25,26 0,41±7% 1,26±7% 1,75±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
13211011.. FHP UOZ 112 G63 210-230/60 1150 21,26 0,53±7% 1,00±7% 1,75±7% 135±7% 50240154000 4006020343
13219506.. BSH 1BA6755 230-240/50 1150 21,5 nem 1,6±7% 1,73±7% 15,1±7% --------------- ---------------
13222781.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584615 220/60 1550 25,26 0,48±7% 1,05±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50204873009 50226588007
13230361.. ECM UAH522300-82R02 230-240/50 1000-1200 21,5 0,73±7% 1,46±7% 2±7% 91±7% --------------- 50216397005
13230362.. ECM UAH522300-82R04 230-240/50 1000-1200 18,5 0,68±7% 1,46±7% 2±7% 91±7% --------------- 50216397005
13230571.. ECM UAH382300-51R03 230-240/50 850 16,4 nem 1,95±7% 2,3±7% 91±7% --------------- 50216397005
13230572.. ECM UAH382300-51R03 230-240/50 850 16,4 nem 1,95±7% 2,3±7% 91±7% --------------- 50216397005
13230573.. ECM UAH382300-51R03 230-240/50 850 14,5 nem 1,95±7% 2,3±7% 91±7% --------------- 50216397005
13241520.. WELLING HXG52B01 230-240/50 1200 21,5 nem 0,91±7% 2,24±7% 103±7% 405505049/8 405505048/0
13241522.. WELLING HXG52A07 230-240/50 1200 21,5 0,8±7% 1,62±7% 2,24±7% 103±7% 405505049/8 405505048/0
13252872.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584024 220-240/50 1000 21,5 0,55±7% 1,1±7% 1,77±7% 184±7% 50204873009 50226588007
13252874.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584456 220-240/50 1000-1200 18,5 0,58±7% 1,15±7% 1,77±7% 184±7% 50204873009 50226588007
13252971.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584087 230/50 1400 25,26 0,45±7% 1,25±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50204873009 50226588007
13260340.. CESET MCA52/64.148/ZN22 230-240/50 1000 21,5 nem 1,62±7% 1,9±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
13260350.. CESET MCA61/64.148/ZN35 230-240/50 1400 25,26 0,65±7% 1,65±7% 1,78±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
13271260.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584631 230/50 1400-1600 25,26 0,67±7% 1,86±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50204873009 50226588007
13271270.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584553 230-240/50 1000-1200 21,5 1,05±7% 2,1±7% 2,14±7% 184±7% 50204873009 50226588007
13271271.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC WU126T55E01 230-240/50 1400 25,26 0,85±7% 2,1±7% 2,14±7% 184±7% 50204873009 50226588007
13271280.. BSH 1BA6765-0ZD 230-240/50 1400-1600 25,26 0,45±7% 1,05±7% 1,56±7% 15,1±7% --------------- ---------------
13273760.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC WU126T55E00 230-240/50 1400 21,5 0,56±7% 1,4±7% 1,6±7% 184±7% 50204873009 50226588007
13275100.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC WU126T35E00 230-240/50 850 14,5 nem 2,2±7% 1,8±7% 184±7% 50204873009 50226588007
599 70 65-97 4/6

(1-2/5) (2-5) (3-4) (6-7) generátor
13275110.. CESET MCA38/64.148/ZN55 230-240/50 850 14,5 nem 2,12±7% 2,25±7% 68,7±7% 50232055009 50216397005
13277151.. WELLING HXG52A09 230-240/50 1400 21,5 0,7±7% 1,46±7% 1,82±7% 103±7% 405505049/8 405505048/0
13277152.. WELLING HXG52A09 230-240/50 1000-1200 18,5 0,7±7% 1,46±7% 1,82±7% 103±7% 405505049/8 405505048/0
13277580.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC WU126T50E00 230-240/50 1000-1200 18,5 0,76±7% 1,53±7% 1,77±7% 184±7% 50204873009 50226588007
14711100.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584616 200-240/50 1000 19 0,61±7% 1,23±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
14711101.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20584616 200-240/50 1000 19 0,61±7% 1,23±7% 1,72±7% 184±7% 50229052001 50226588007
Megjegyzések a tekercseléssel kapcsolatban:
ª Ellenőrizze a csatlakozókat (huzalozást) és, hogy nincsenek-e kilógó vagy megtört érintkezők. Csatlakozódoboz
ª Ellenőrizze, nincsenek-e vízre vagy mosóporrautaló jelek vagy ilyen lerakodások, illetve vizsgálja meg azok okait ½ mező Állórész Forgórész Tacho
ª Ellenőrizze a földelt tekercseket / alkatrészeket (illetve a gyenge földelésűeket) egy minimum 40 MΩ teljesítményű 1-2/5 2-5 3-4 6-7
teszterrel, az egyes érintkező és a ház (vörös ∞) között.
P=motorvédő
R=forgórész
S=állórész
T=tachometrikus
599 70 65-97 5/6

HÁROMFÁZISÚ MOTOROK (8/5-érintkezős csatlakozódobozzal)
Motorkód Márka Típus V/Hz Állórész Állórész Állórész
sebesség Ø mm Tacho (7-8) Tachometrikus generátor
(4-5) (4-6) (5-6)
13219300.. CESET CIM 2/55-132ZH 195/300 1800 25,26 5,4±7% 5,4±7% 5,4±7% 121±7% 50280023008
Tekercsellenállás (Ω)
Állórész Állórész Állórész
Tacho (4-5)
(1-2) (2-3) (1-3)
13247650.. SOLE/ACC/NIDEC 20585119 195/300 1800 25,26 5,4±7% 5,4±7% 5,4±7% 188±7% 50296236008
13238680.. ECM CZ-551950-51R01 195/300 1800 25,26 5,4±7% 5,4±7% 5,4±7% 91±7% ---------------
14710100.. CESET CIM 2/55-132ZH 195/300 1800 25,26 5,4±7% 5,4±7% 5,4±7% 121±7% 50280023008
Megjegyzések a tekercseléssel kapcsolatban: Csatlakozódoboz (8-érintkezős) Csatlakozódoboz (5-érintkezős)

Állórész Állórész Állórész Tacho Állórész Állórész Állórész Tacho
ª Ellenőrizze a csatlakozókat (huzalozást) és, hogy nincsenek-e kilógó
vagy megtört érintkezők. 4-5 4-6 5-6 7-8 1-2 2-3 1-3 4-5
ª Ellenőrizze, nincsenek-e vízre vagy mosóporrautaló jelek vagy ilyen
lerakodások, illetve vizsgálja meg azok okait
ª Ellenőrizze a földelt tekercseket / alkatrészeket (illetve a gyenge
földelésűeket) egy minimum 40 MΩ teljesítményű teszterrel, az egyes
érintkező és a ház (vörös ∞) között.
S=állórész
T=tachometrikus
Revízió Dátum Leírás

01 06/2009 Beszállítói lista és táblázat frissítése
02 11/2010 Beszállítói lista és táblázat frissítése
599 70 65-97 6/6

SERVICE BULLETIN
NOT CONFIGURED ELECTRONIC BOARDS (Rev. 02)
In the sections:
- “Electrical equipment” in Washing machines, Washer-dryers, Dryers and Dishwashers spare part lists.
- “Diffuser” or “Cooling Unit” in Refrigeration appliances.
the “configured electronic board”, identified by the first digits “973” of the spare part, is featured, where possible.
Also the “not configured electronic board” can be indicated in the same sections and with the same position.
The configuration of this board is possible only if you have the suitable equipment (software and hardware) for
this type of activity and if you have taken part to the training.
It is still not possible to programme the not configured electronic boards in all Countries.
ATTENTION:
We will not accept returns of not configured electronic boards that have been wrongly ordered or that are
damaged in some parts.
For any further question please contact your local Service Representative.
REVISIONS:
Revision Date Description
00 05/2008 Document creation
01 06/2008 Updated text
02 11/2008 Updated document for use in Refrigeration appliances
EN Publication no. 599 70 81-16 Rev. 02 11/2008 PR

SERVICE BULLETIN
WASHING
2520-2530
NEW CLAMPS (REV.00)
Some clamps are mounted inside the washing machines and once they have been used, they can not be
used again, because while removing them, they deform and lose their characteristics.
These clamps are used to fasten the hoses that connect:

- the solenoid valve-to the conveyor
- the recirculation hose-to the rubber bellow
- the pressure chamber-to drain hose
- the tub-to the drain hose
- the detergent fill hose-to the detergent compartment
Find below the part no. and the position.
SPARE PART NOS.
Part no. Diameter ∅ Position
Solenoid valve-conveyor hose
132 31 59-00/2 20.5 mm
Recirculation hose
132 31 59-10/1 18.5 mm Solenoid valve-conveyor hose
132 31 59-20/0 52.5 mm

Pressure chamber
132 31 59-30/9 45.5 mm
132 31 59-40/8 40.5 mm Drain hose-pump body
132 31 59-70/5 65.5 mm Detergent fill hose
Revision Date Description

00 09/2008 Document creation
EN Publication no. 599 71 18-12 Rev. 00 09/2008 dmm
599 71 18 12 1/1
SERVICE BULLETIN
WASHING
2520-2530
ASSEMBLING THE BEARING SPIDER TO THE DRUM BY MEANS OF THREE

SCREWS
DESCRIPTION:
With the introduction of the electronic board to control the operation of the washing machines, the drum assy
and the bearing spider are assembled by means of three screws (one for each lifter).
FIXING BY MEANS OF 3 SCREWS
On appliances provided with a mechanical timer, the assembling of the drum and the bearing spider was
carried out by means of 6 screws (two for each lifter).
FIXING BY MEANS OF 6 SCREWS
PART NOS.:
As spare part, you will receive the drum assy already assembled to the bearing spider by means of 3 screws.
If the mentioned drum assy has to be used on appliances with a mechanical timer, it is necessary to
add the missing screws:
- if the current screw is of the hex type, please use screw part no. 124 02 20-01 / 0
while
- if the current screw is a torx shaped one, please use screw part no. 124 02 20-20 / 0.
EN Publication No. 599 71 24-30 Rev. 00 10/2008 dmm
599 71 24 30 1/1
SERVICE BULLETIN
WASHING
2520-2530
HEATING ELEMENT (with or without fuse)
Appliances with timers and electronic control systems in the EWM1000-EWM1000plus-EWM2000evo-
EWM3000new product platforms are fitted with an ANTI-BOILING PRESSURE SWITCH as a safety device.
The heating element is of the normal type, and the contacts of the incorporated NTC sensor are 5mm apart (see
figure below).
HEATING ELEMENT WITHOUT FUSE, WITH NTC (distance 5mm)

NTC
(5mm)
However, the safety device used in current-production electronic appliances (ENV06 product platform) is a
heating element with two fuses (located inside the branches) which, in case of overheating, will open and
disconnect the heating element from the power supply. The contacts of the incorporated NTC sensor are 2.5mm
apart (see figure below).
HEATING ELEMENT WITH FUSE AND NTC (distance 2.5mm)

NTC
(2.5mm)
The two versions of the heating element are identical in appearance; the only difference is the distance between
the contacts of the NTC sensor.
PROCEED AS FOLLOWS TO PREVENT COMPROMISING THE SAFETY OF THE APPLIANCE:
If it is necessary to replace the heating element, proceed as follows:

1. Check the code listed in the Service Note relative to the appliance so
that a heating element without fuses is not used when safety norms
require the use of a heating element with fuses.
2. Do NOT remove and/or switch the NTC sensors between different

versions of the heating element.
3. Check the code stamped on the flange of the heating element:
ª On heating elements without fuses, the code may be stamped B

in different formats.
ª On heating elements fitted with fuses, the complete code is
marked (A) and shows the symbols representing the fuses for
each branch (B) (see figure opposite).
EN Publication number 599 72 33-67 Ed. 00 11/2009 dmm

SERVICE BULLETIN
MOSÁS
2520/2530
VÍZ FOLYIK A DOBBA LEKAPCSOLT MOSÓGÉP (OFF) MELLETT
Az új mosógépek élettartamának első hónapja alatt a következő fordulhat elő: lekapcsolt (OFF) berendezés
mellett, miközben a csap nyitott állapotban található, víz folyik a dobba. Ez a kellemetlenség abból eredhet,
hogy a membrán és az elektromos szelep közé idegen testek rakódtak le, vagy a víznyomás nem éri el a
minimális 0,05 MPa (0,5 bar) nyomást, ami meghibásodáshoz vezethet.
ELEKTROMOS SZELEP
EGYUTAS KÉTUTAS HÁROMUTAS
Megoldások:
A) Ha a vevő azért telefonál, mert a probléma egyszer előfordult, javasolja egy rövid ciklus
elvégzését, hogy az átfolyó víz eltávolítsa az akadályt.
B) Amennyiben a vevő jelzi, hogy a probléma folyamatos jelleggel fennáll (egymást követő
több ciklusban), akkor a szervizszolgálat beavatkozására van szükség, hogy ellenőrizze a
víznyomást, aminek a minimális érték felett kell lennie. Ha ez eléri a megfelelő értéket, le
kell cserélni az elektromos szelepet.
ÜGYFÉLSZOLGÁLATI INFORMÁCIÓ
Válassza le a csatlakozásokat és húzza ki a csöveket
Csavarja ki a lefolyó csövet

Nyomja meg csavarhúzóval a két rögzítőt,
amelyek a berendezés hátsó felére rögzítik az elektromos szelepet.
Fordítsa el 90° fokkal, majd húzza ki.
HU Kiadás száma 599 73 09-03 Rev. 00 06/2010 dmm
599 73 09 03 1/1
SERVICE VIDEO
WASHING
LEAKAGE FROM DOOR GASKET DUE TO TRAPPING CLOTHES BETWEEN DOOR

GLASS AND GASKET
PROBLEM DESCRIPTION:
In case of clothes trapped between door glass and gasket problem of twisted lip can occur. The leakage are
consequence of twisted lip of gasket (load is usually not damaged). Due to the leakages customer calls
service center.
a) b) c)
Pic. 1. Different degrees of door gasket deformation/damage: a) small deformation, b) tear, c) detached
fragment of seal
a) b) c)
Pictures above show

a) How clothes are trapped,
b) main area of door gasket damages,
c) informative sticker visible below door gasket.
EN Technical Support MDM 1/2 599 75 81-42 Rev.00

MODEL REFERS TO:
All front loading washing machine
VIDEO FOR CUSTOMER INFORMATION:

Film shows the way how door gasket is damaged
Please click on picture above to play movie.

.
PROCEEDING:
Cases like this shown on the movie should be reported as a „customer misuse” or with the consent
of the central service as a “good will” – and to avoid cases repetition please advice customer how to
avoid this kind of problem
EN Technical Support MDM 2/2 599 75 81-42 Rev.00

SZERVIZ HÍRLEVÉL
MOSÁS
2520-2530
MINDEN AJTÓZÁRAT BIZTONSÁGI SZEMPONTBÓL ELLENŐRIZNI KELL

MINDEN SZERVIZHÍVÁS ESETÉN (02. átdolgozás)
AMENNYIBEN KI TUDJA NYITNI BÁRMELYIK AJTÓT, AMIKOR ANNAK ZÁRVA KELLENE LENNIE,
VÁLASSZA LE A KÉSZÜLÉKET A HÁLÓZATI FESZÜLTSÉGRŐL, ÉS JAVASOLJA AZ ÜGYFÉLNEK, HOGY
NE HASZNÁLJA A KÉSZÜLÉKET, ÉS AZ A.I.R. ADATBÁZISBAN EGGYEL NÖVELJE A BEJEGYZÉSEK
SZÁMÁT.
 Garanciaidőn belül:
 Cserélje a készüléket egy ugyanolyan vagy helyettesítő típusra
 A garanciaidőn belüli, az ügyfelektől összegyűjtött készülékeket el kell küldeni a porciai laboratóriumba
(a címet lásd alább).
 Garanciaidőn kívül.
 Javítsa meg a készüléket
 Azonban a szerviztechnikus nem hagyhatja a gépet működőképes állapotban, ha az ajtózár nem
működik a szervizhíváskor. A nem biztonságos készüléket tilos működőképes állapotban az ügyfélnél
hagyni.
 A hibás ajtózárat az alábbi címre kell küldeni:
Product Safety Laboratory

Corso Lino Zanussi N°30
33080 Porcia (Pordenone) Italy.
Az ellenőrzést el kell végezni az összes márkánál és az összes típusnál.
FIGYELEM:
Minden egyes javítás után be kell kapcsolni a diagnosztika üzemmódot, hogy leellenőrizze a különböző
egységek működését, és a 9. fázisnál, amikor a készülék eléri a maximális fordulatszámát, ellenőrizze, hogy az
ajtó nem nyitható-e ki.
Amennyiben a diagnosztika üzemmód nem áll rendelkezésre (pl. időzítős kivitelnél), a szerviztechnikus az ajtó
helyes működését a centrifugálási cikluskor ellenőrizheti.
KÓD
Ehhez a művelethez az alábbit használja kódként:
WC 17 Garancia
WC 36 Garanciális csere
MÓDOSÍTÁSOK:
Módosítás Dátum Megnevezés Szerző Jóváhagyta/dátum

00 07/2013 Dokumentum létrehozása DMM XX – 0X/201X
frissített cím: hozzáadva a 33080
01 07/2013 DMM XX – 0X/201X
és hozzáadva néhány mondat
Frissítve a garanciaidőn kívüli állapotról a
02 08/2013 DMM XX – 0X/201X
Garanciális csere állapotra
EN Technical Support - DMM 1/1 599 76 88-17 02. átdolgozás

Legend for Diagram P00ZP300003126
Item Description
Anti-interference ﬁlter Zavarszűrő, mikrohullámú sütő
Door safety interlok Ajtó biztonsági zárolás
Drain pump Ürítő szivattyú
Earth Földelés
Heating element earth Fűtőbetét földelés
Heating elements (washing) Fűtőbetétek (mosás)
Junction box Kábelköteg doboz
Main electronic board Fő elektronikus alaplap
Motor Motor
Motor earth Motor földelés
Motor overload cut-out Motor túlterhelés kikapcsoló
Pilot lamp Jelzőlámpa
Pressure switch Nyomáskapcsoló
Prewasch valve Előmosás szelep
Temperature probe Hőfok szonda
Tub earth Üst földelés
Wash valve Főmosás vízszelep
Black Fekete
Blue Kék
Brown Barna
Green Zöld
Green-yellow Sárga/zöld
Grey Szürke
Orange Narancs
Pink Rózsaszin
Red Piros
Violet Lila

Electrolux - Ewf - 1230 Service

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrolux - Ewf - 1230 Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EMA

PNC ELC Márkanév Modell Piac

Electrolux Italia S.p.A. Publikáció szám

Poz. Anyagszám Mátrix Megnevezés

106 1249470103 A Összekötő darab,2 utas,3 SCOMP.

Poz. Anyagszám Mátrix Megnevezés

013 1320163007 A Gmb ,biztonsági ,ökörszemablak,Ø15mm

Poz. Anyagszám Mátrix Megnevezés

004 1321950212 A Motor,230-240V,50Hz

Poz. Anyagszám Mátrix Megnevezés

115 1320041906 A Zárt átjáró,RIM

Poz. Anyagszám Mátrix Megnevezés

313 3790012219 A Munkalap

Anti-interference filter Zavarszűrő, mikrohullámú sütő

3. A tárolt riasztás törlése (11. oldal).

2.2 A DIAGNOSZTIKAI RENDSZER ELÉRÉSE – FÜGGOLEGES GOMBELRENDEZÉSU

Kapcsoló állása Aktív részek Üzemi körülmények Felülvizsgált funkciók

• Ajtózárolás. Ajtó zárva Vízfeltöltés

• Ajtózárolás. Ajtó zárva Vízfeltöltés

• Ajtózárolás. Ajtó zárva

Normál esetben a használó számára minden riasztás kijelezheto, ezen kívül:

A riasztó kijelzések a mosóprogram alatt aktivizálva vannak. Ebbol kivétel a konfiguráció és a

3.1.1 Riasztó kijelzések a normál gépüzem alatt

Többszörös villogást jelez az E41 riasztás két betujének egyike (a riasztó

Miután bezárta az ajtót, ebben az esetben csak a Start-gombot kell megnyomni a

3.2.1 Riasztó kijelzések

3.2.2 Riasztó kijelzési példák

3.2.3 A riasztó kijelzések alakulása a diagnosztikai program alatt

3.3.1. Változat vízszintes gombokkal

3.3.2. Változat függoleges gombokkal

→ Nyomja meg egyszerre a 3-as és a 2-es gombokat és legalább 2

3.4.1 A RIASZTÁS TÖRLÉSE – VÍZSZINTES GOMBELRENDEZÉSU VÁLTOZAT

1. A riasztás kiolvasásának aktivizálásához (a programválasztó tizedik pozíciója, lásd 3.2. fejezet).

3.5. A RIASZTÁS TÖRLÉSE – FÜGGOLEGES GOMBELRENDEZÉSU VÁLTOZAT

1. A riasztás kiolvasásának aktivizálásához (a programválasztó tizedik pozíciója, lásd 3.2. fejezet).

Riasztás Leírása Lehetséges hiba Tevékenység / gép állapot Reset

Rendben van az áramvezeto kábel Nem Az áramvezeto kábelt kicserélni /

4.1.2. Az elektronikus lap több LED-je világít

Szabadon mozognak a gombok a Nem A mechanikus problémát kijavítani

Ha a folapon égési nyomok vannak,

Tiszta a kifolyó szuro? NEM Tisztítsa ki a kifolyó szurot és futtassa le újra a

Kábelezést ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a

Mechanikusan NEM Az elektromos lapot kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a

A kábelezést ellenorizni/kicserélni és újra lefuttatni a

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

Az elektronikus lapot kicserélni és

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

A víz kiszivattyúzása az öblíto tartályból. A nyomásellenorzést

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

Kikapcsolt készüléknél is A diagnosztikai Rendesen zár a Cserélje ki a

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

Ajtót rendesen bezárni és újra

Ellenorizni a kábelezést az ajtózárolás és a NEM Zárófogat/ajtót kicserélni.

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

A mechanikus összeköttetést az ajtózárolás NEM Zárófogat/ajtót kicserélni.

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

A mechanikus összeköttetést az ajtózárolás NEM Zárófogat/ajtót kicserélni.

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

A mechanikus összeköttetést az ajtózárolás NEM Zárófogat/ajtót kicserélni.

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

3 érintkezo 3 vagy 4 érintkezos az 4 érintkezos

Ha a folapon égési nyomok

After removing the rear panel from the appliance, Important!

After repairing the appliance, always perform the

Alkaline (Base) detergents